00a0fa4339df3db16f206ae5c439df4e4402ada4
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set POWERPC
33 @set POWERPC64
34 @set Renesas
35 @set SPU
36 @set TICOFF
37 @set WIN32
38 @set XTENSA
39 @end ifset
40 @c man end
41
42 @ifnottex
43 @dircategory Software development
44 @direntry
45 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46 @end direntry
47 @end ifnottex
48
49 @copying
50 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53 @end ifset
54 version @value{VERSION}.
55
56 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
57
58 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
59 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
60 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
61 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
62 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
63 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
64 @end copying
65 @iftex
66 @finalout
67 @setchapternewpage odd
68 @settitle The GNU linker
69 @titlepage
70 @title The GNU linker
71 @sp 1
72 @subtitle @code{ld}
73 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
74 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
75 @end ifset
76 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
77 @author Steve Chamberlain
78 @author Ian Lance Taylor
79 @page
80
81 @tex
82 {\parskip=0pt
83 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
84 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
85 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
86 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
87 }
88 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
89 @end tex
90
91 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
92 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
93 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
94
95 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
96 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
97 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
98 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
99 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
100 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
101 @c man end
102
103 @end titlepage
104 @end iftex
105 @contents
106 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
107
108 @ifnottex
109 @node Top
110 @top LD
111 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
112 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
113 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
114 @end ifset
115 version @value{VERSION}.
116
117 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
118 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
119 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
120
121 @menu
122 * Overview:: Overview
123 * Invocation:: Invocation
124 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
125 @ifset GENERIC
126 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
127 @end ifset
128 @ifclear GENERIC
129 @ifset H8300
130 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
131 @end ifset
132 @ifset Renesas
133 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset I960
136 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset SPU
160 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset TICOFF
163 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset WIN32
166 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset XTENSA
169 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170 @end ifset
171 @end ifclear
172 @ifclear SingleFormat
173 * BFD:: BFD
174 @end ifclear
175 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
179 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
180 * LD Index:: LD Index
181 @end menu
182 @end ifnottex
183
184 @node Overview
185 @chapter Overview
186
187 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188 @cindex what is this?
189
190 @ifset man
191 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
192 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
193 @c man end
194
195 @c man begin SEEALSO
196 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198 @file{ld}.
199 @c man end
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
204 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
205 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
206 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
207
208 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
209 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
212 @ifset man
213 @c For the man only
214 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
215 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
217 @end ifset
218
219 @ifclear SingleFormat
220 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
222 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225 @end ifclear
226
227 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
230 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
231 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
233 @c man end
234
235 @node Invocation
236 @chapter Invocation
237
238 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
240 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
241 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242 you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
244 @c man end
245
246 @ifset UsesEnvVars
247 @menu
248 * Options:: Command Line Options
249 * Environment:: Environment Variables
250 @end menu
251
252 @node Options
253 @section Command Line Options
254 @end ifset
255
256 @cindex command line
257 @cindex options
258
259 @c man begin OPTIONS
260
261 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263 @cindex standard Unix system
264 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
265 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266 link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268 @smallexample
269 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270 @end smallexample
271
272 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
273 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
277 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
278 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
283 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285 noted in the descriptions below.
286
287 @cindex object files
288 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291 an option and its argument.
292
293 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297 message @samp{No input files}.
298
299 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
300 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
305 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
310
311 For options whose names are a single letter,
312 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314 option that requires them.
315
316 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
317 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
318 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
319 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
320 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
321 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323 output.
324
325 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330 accepted.
331
332 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
334 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335 compiler driver) like this:
336
337 @smallexample
338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
339 @end smallexample
340
341 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
342 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349 @smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351 @end smallexample
352
353 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354 linker:
355
356 @table @gcctabopt
357 @include at-file.texi
358
359 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
360 @item -a @var{keyword}
361 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376 interface.
377
378 @ifset I960
379 @cindex architectures
380 @kindex -A @var{arch}
381 @item -A @var{architecture}
382 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
384 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
386 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
388 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
389 family}, for details.
390
391 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
392 other architecture families.
393 @end ifset
394
395 @ifclear SingleFormat
396 @cindex binary input format
397 @kindex -b @var{format}
398 @kindex --format=@var{format}
399 @cindex input format
400 @cindex input format
401 @item -b @var{input-format}
402 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
403 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
405 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
406 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
407 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
408 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
409 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413 @xref{BFD}.
414
415 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417 linking object files of different formats), by including
418 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
419 particular format.
420
421 The default format is taken from the environment variable
422 @code{GNUTARGET}.
423 @ifset UsesEnvVars
424 @xref{Environment}.
425 @end ifset
426 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
427 @code{TARGET};
428 @ifclear man
429 see @ref{Format Commands}.
430 @end ifclear
431 @end ifclear
432
433 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435 @cindex compatibility, MRI
436 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
438 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
439 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
440 @ifclear man
441 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442 @end ifclear
443 @ifset man
444 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445 @end ifset
446 Introduce MRI script files with
447 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
448 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
450 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452 @cindex common allocation
453 @kindex -d
454 @kindex -dc
455 @kindex -dp
456 @item -d
457 @itemx -dc
458 @itemx -dp
459 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
465 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
476 @cindex entry point, from command line
477 @kindex -e @var{entry}
478 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
479 @item -e @var{entry}
480 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
489 @kindex --exclude-libs
490 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
492 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
493 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498 be treated as hidden.
499
500 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511 regardless of this option.
512
513 @cindex dynamic symbol table
514 @kindex -E
515 @kindex --export-dynamic
516 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
517 @item -E
518 @itemx --export-dynamic
519 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
520 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
529
530 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533 linking the program itself.
534
535 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
536 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
537 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
538
539 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
543 @ifclear SingleFormat
544 @cindex big-endian objects
545 @cindex endianness
546 @kindex -EB
547 @item -EB
548 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550 @cindex little-endian objects
551 @kindex -EL
552 @item -EL
553 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
554 @end ifclear
555
556 @kindex -f @var{name}
557 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558 @item -f @var{name}
559 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573 machine specific performance.
574
575 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
578 @kindex -F @var{name}
579 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
580 @item -F @var{name}
581 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
582 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593 @var{name}.
594
595 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
596 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
597 object files.
598 @ifclear SingleFormat
599 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
600 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
601 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
602 environment variable.
603 @end ifclear
604 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605 creating an ELF shared object.
606
607 @cindex finalization function
608 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
609 @item -fini=@var{name}
610 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613 the function to call.
614
615 @kindex -g
616 @item -g
617 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
619 @kindex -G @var{value}
620 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
621 @cindex object size
622 @item -G @var{value}
623 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
627 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629 @cindex runtime library name
630 @kindex -h @var{name}
631 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
632 @item -h @var{name}
633 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640 @kindex -i
641 @cindex incremental link
642 @item -i
643 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
645 @cindex initialization function
646 @kindex -init=@var{name}
647 @item -init=@var{name}
648 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651 function to call.
652
653 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
654 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
655 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
656 @item -l @var{namespec}
657 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
661 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
662 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
663
664 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
665 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671 @var{filename}.
672
673 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
680 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
681 archives multiple times.
682
683 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685 @ifset GENERIC
686 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
687 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
688 behaviour of the AIX linker.
689 @end ifset
690
691 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
692 @kindex -L @var{dir}
693 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
694 @item -L @var{searchdir}
695 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
696 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
698 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
701 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
702 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704 option is specified.
705
706 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
709 @ifset UsesEnvVars
710 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
711 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
712 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713 @end ifset
714
715 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719 @cindex emulation
720 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
721 @item -m @var{emulation}
722 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729 configured.
730
731 @cindex link map
732 @kindex -M
733 @kindex --print-map
734 @item -M
735 @itemx --print-map
736 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737 information about the link, including the following:
738
739 @itemize @bullet
740 @item
741 Where object files are mapped into memory.
742 @item
743 How common symbols are allocated.
744 @item
745 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
747 @item
748 The values assigned to symbols.
749
750 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756 linker script containing:
757
758 @smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762 @end smallexample
763
764 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765 option is used:
766
767 @smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771 @end smallexample
772
773 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774 scripts.
775 @end itemize
776
777 @kindex -n
778 @cindex read-only text
779 @cindex NMAGIC
780 @kindex --nmagic
781 @item -n
782 @itemx --nmagic
783 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
784 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
785 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
786
787 @kindex -N
788 @kindex --omagic
789 @cindex read/write from cmd line
790 @cindex OMAGIC
791 @item -N
792 @itemx --omagic
793 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
794 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
795 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
796 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
797 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
798 specification published by Microsoft.
799
800 @kindex --no-omagic
801 @cindex OMAGIC
802 @item --no-omagic
803 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
804 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
805 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
806 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
807
808 @kindex -o @var{output}
809 @kindex --output=@var{output}
810 @cindex naming the output file
811 @item -o @var{output}
812 @itemx --output=@var{output}
813 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
814 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
815 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
816
817 @kindex -O @var{level}
818 @cindex generating optimized output
819 @item -O @var{level}
820 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
821 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
822 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
823 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
824 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
825 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
826 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
827
828 @kindex -q
829 @kindex --emit-relocs
830 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
831 @item -q
832 @itemx --emit-relocs
833 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
834 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
835 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
836 in larger executables.
837
838 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
839
840 @kindex --force-dynamic
841 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
842 @item --force-dynamic
843 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
844 to VxWorks targets.
845
846 @cindex partial link
847 @cindex relocatable output
848 @kindex -r
849 @kindex --relocatable
850 @item -r
851 @itemx --relocatable
852 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
853 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
854 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
855 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
856 @code{OMAGIC}.
857 @c ; see @option{-N}.
858 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
859 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
860 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
861
862 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
863 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
864 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
865 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
866 with input files in other formats at all.
867
868 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
869
870 @kindex -R @var{file}
871 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
872 @cindex symbol-only input
873 @item -R @var{filename}
874 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
875 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
876 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
877 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
878 programs. You may use this option more than once.
879
880 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
881 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
882 the @option{-rpath} option.
883
884 @kindex -s
885 @kindex --strip-all
886 @cindex strip all symbols
887 @item -s
888 @itemx --strip-all
889 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
890
891 @kindex -S
892 @kindex --strip-debug
893 @cindex strip debugger symbols
894 @item -S
895 @itemx --strip-debug
896 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
897
898 @kindex -t
899 @kindex --trace
900 @cindex input files, displaying
901 @item -t
902 @itemx --trace
903 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
904
905 @kindex -T @var{script}
906 @kindex --script=@var{script}
907 @cindex script files
908 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
909 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
910 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
911 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
912 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
913 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
914 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
915 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
916 options accumulate.
917
918 @kindex -dT @var{script}
919 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
920 @cindex script files
921 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
922 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
923 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
924
925 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
926 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
927 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
928 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
929 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
930 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
931 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
932 @samp{gcc}).
933
934 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
935 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
936 @cindex undefined symbol
937 @item -u @var{symbol}
938 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
939 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
940 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
941 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
942 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
943 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
944
945 @kindex -Ur
946 @cindex constructors
947 @item -Ur
948 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
949 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
950 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
951 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
952 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
953 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
954 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
955 @samp{-r} for the others.
956
957 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
960 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
961 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
962 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
963 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
964 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
965 in a linker script.
966
967 @kindex -v
968 @kindex -V
969 @kindex --version
970 @cindex version
971 @item -v
972 @itemx --version
973 @itemx -V
974 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
975 lists the supported emulations.
976
977 @kindex -x
978 @kindex --discard-all
979 @cindex deleting local symbols
980 @item -x
981 @itemx --discard-all
982 Delete all local symbols.
983
984 @kindex -X
985 @kindex --discard-locals
986 @cindex local symbols, deleting
987 @item -X
988 @itemx --discard-locals
989 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
990 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
991 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
992
993 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
994 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
995 @cindex symbol tracing
996 @item -y @var{symbol}
997 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
999 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1000 to prepend an underscore.
1001
1002 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1003 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1004
1005 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1006 @item -Y @var{path}
1007 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1008 for Solaris compatibility.
1009
1010 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1011 @item -z @var{keyword}
1012 The recognized keywords are:
1013 @table @samp
1014
1015 @item combreloc
1016 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1017 lookup caching possible.
1018
1019 @item defs
1020 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1021 shared libraries are still allowed.
1022
1023 @item execstack
1024 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1025
1026 @item global
1027 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1028 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1029 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1030
1031 @item initfirst
1032 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1033 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1034 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1035 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1036 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1037 objects.
1038
1039 @item interpose
1040 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1041 but the primary executable.
1042
1043 @item lazy
1044 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1045 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1046 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1047 Lazy binding is the default.
1048
1049 @item loadfltr
1050 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1051 runtime.
1052
1053 @item muldefs
1054 Allows multiple definitions.
1055
1056 @item nocombreloc
1057 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1058
1059 @item nocopyreloc
1060 Disables production of copy relocs.
1061
1062 @item nodefaultlib
1063 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1064 ignore any default library search paths.
1065
1066 @item nodelete
1067 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1068
1069 @item nodlopen
1070 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1071
1072 @item nodump
1073 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1074
1075 @item noexecstack
1076 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1077
1078 @item norelro
1079 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1080
1081 @item now
1082 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1083 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1084 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1085 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1086 first called.
1087
1088 @item origin
1089 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1090
1091 @item relro
1092 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1093
1094 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1095 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1096
1097 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1098 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1099
1100 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1101 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1102 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1103 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1104
1105 @end table
1106
1107 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1108
1109 @kindex -(
1110 @cindex groups of archives
1111 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1112 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1113 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1114 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1115
1116 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1117 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1118 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1119 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1120 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1121 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1122 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1123 resolved.
1124
1125 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1126 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1127 more archives.
1128
1129 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1130 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1131 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1132 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1133 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1134 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1135 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1136 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1137 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1138 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1139 restore the old behaviour.
1140
1141 @kindex --as-needed
1142 @kindex --no-as-needed
1143 @item --as-needed
1144 @itemx --no-as-needed
1145 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1146 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1147 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1148 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1149 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1150 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1151 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1152 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1153 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1154 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1155 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1156 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1157 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1158
1159 @kindex --add-needed
1160 @kindex --no-add-needed
1161 @item --add-needed
1162 @itemx --no-add-needed
1163 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1164 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1165 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1166 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1167
1168 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1169 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1170 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1171
1172 @kindex -Bdynamic
1173 @kindex -dy
1174 @kindex -call_shared
1175 @item -Bdynamic
1176 @itemx -dy
1177 @itemx -call_shared
1178 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1179 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1180 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1181 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1182 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1183 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1184
1185 @kindex -Bgroup
1186 @item -Bgroup
1187 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1188 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1189 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1190 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1191 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1192
1193 @kindex -Bstatic
1194 @kindex -dn
1195 @kindex -non_shared
1196 @kindex -static
1197 @item -Bstatic
1198 @itemx -dn
1199 @itemx -non_shared
1200 @itemx -static
1201 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1202 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1203 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1204 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1205 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1206 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1207 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1208 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1209 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1210 libraries.
1211
1212 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1213 @item -Bsymbolic
1214 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1215 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1216 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1217 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1218 platforms which support shared libraries.
1219
1220 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1221 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1222 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1223 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1224 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1225 libraries.
1226
1227 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1228 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1229 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1230 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1231 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1232 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1233 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1234 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1235 which support shared libraries.
1236
1237 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1238 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1239
1240 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1241 @item --dynamic-list-data
1242 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1243
1244 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1245 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1246 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1247 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1248
1249 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1250 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1251 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1252
1253 @kindex --check-sections
1254 @kindex --no-check-sections
1255 @item --check-sections
1256 @itemx --no-check-sections
1257 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1258 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1259 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1260 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1261 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1262 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1263 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1264 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1265 option.
1266
1267 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1268 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1269 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1270 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1271 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1272 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1273 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1274 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1275 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1276 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1277 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1278 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1279
1280 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1281 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1282 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1283 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1284 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1285 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1286 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1287 symbols.
1288
1289 @cindex cross reference table
1290 @kindex --cref
1291 @item --cref
1292 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1293 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1294 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1295
1296 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1297 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1298 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1299 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1300 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1301 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1302 symbol are listed.
1303
1304 @cindex common allocation
1305 @kindex --no-define-common
1306 @item --no-define-common
1307 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1308 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1309 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1310
1311 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1312 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1313 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1314 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1315 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1316 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1317 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1318 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1319 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1320 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1321
1322 @cindex symbols, from command line
1323 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1324 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1325 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1326 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1327 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1328 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1329 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1330 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1331 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1332 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1333 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1334 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1335 @var{expression}.
1336
1337 @cindex demangling, from command line
1338 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1339 @kindex --no-demangle
1340 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1341 @itemx --no-demangle
1342 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1343 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1344 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1345 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1346 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1347 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1348 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1349 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1350 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1351
1352 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1353 @kindex -I@var{file}
1354 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1355 @item -I@var{file}
1356 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1357 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1358 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1359 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1360 doing.
1361
1362 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1363 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1364 @item --fatal-warnings
1365 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1366 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1367 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1368
1369 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1370 @item --force-exe-suffix
1371 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1372
1373 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1374 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1375 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1376 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1377 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1378 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1379
1380 @kindex --gc-sections
1381 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1382 @cindex garbage collection
1383 @item --gc-sections
1384 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1385 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1386 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1387 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1388 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1389
1390 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1391 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1392 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1393 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1394 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1395 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1396 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1397 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1398 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1399
1400 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1401 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1402 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1403 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1404
1405 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1406 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1407 @cindex garbage collection
1408 @item --print-gc-sections
1409 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1410 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1411 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1412 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1413 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1414 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1415 line.
1416
1417 @kindex --print-output-format
1418 @cindex output format
1419 @item --print-output-format
1420 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1421 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1422 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1423
1424 @cindex help
1425 @cindex usage
1426 @kindex --help
1427 @item --help
1428 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1429
1430 @kindex --target-help
1431 @item --target-help
1432 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1433
1434 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1435 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1436 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1437 @option{-M} option, above.
1438
1439 @cindex memory usage
1440 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1441 @item --no-keep-memory
1442 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1443 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1444 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1445 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1446 while linking a large executable.
1447
1448 @kindex --no-undefined
1449 @kindex -z defs
1450 @item --no-undefined
1451 @itemx -z defs
1452 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1453 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1454 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1455 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1456 libraries being linked in.
1457
1458 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1459 @kindex -z muldefs
1460 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1461 @itemx -z muldefs
1462 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1463 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1464 first definition will be used.
1465
1466 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1467 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1468 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1469 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1470 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1471 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1472 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1473 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1474 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1475
1476 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1477 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1478 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1479 a shared library.
1480
1481 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1482 libraries specified at link time are that:
1483
1484 @itemize @bullet
1485 @item
1486 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1487 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1488 resolvable at load time.
1489 @item
1490 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1491 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1492
1493 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1494 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1495 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1496 appropriate memset function.
1497 @end itemize
1498
1499 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1500 @item --no-undefined-version
1501 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1502 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1503 will be issued instead.
1504
1505 @kindex --default-symver
1506 @item --default-symver
1507 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1508 exported symbols.
1509
1510 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1511 @item --default-imported-symver
1512 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1513 imported symbols.
1514
1515 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1516 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1517 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1518 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1519 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1520 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1521 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1522 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1523 inappropriate.
1524
1525 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1526 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1527 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1528 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1529
1530 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1531 @item --no-whole-archive
1532 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1533 archive files.
1534
1535 @cindex output file after errors
1536 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1537 @item --noinhibit-exec
1538 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1539 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1540 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1541 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1542
1543 @kindex -nostdlib
1544 @item -nostdlib
1545 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1546 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1547 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1548
1549 @ifclear SingleFormat
1550 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1551 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1552 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1553 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1554 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1555 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1556 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1557 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1558 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1559 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1560 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1561 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1562 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1563 @end ifclear
1564
1565 @kindex -pie
1566 @kindex --pic-executable
1567 @item -pie
1568 @itemx --pic-executable
1569 @cindex position independent executables
1570 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1571 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1572 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1573 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1574 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1575 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1576
1577 @kindex -qmagic
1578 @item -qmagic
1579 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1580
1581 @kindex -Qy
1582 @item -Qy
1583 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1584
1585 @kindex --relax
1586 @cindex synthesizing linker
1587 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1588 @cindex --no-relax
1589 @item --relax
1590 @itemx --no-relax
1591 An option with machine dependent effects.
1592 @ifset GENERIC
1593 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1594 @end ifset
1595 @ifset H8300
1596 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1597 @end ifset
1598 @ifset I960
1599 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1600 @end ifset
1601 @ifset XTENSA
1602 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1603 @end ifset
1604 @ifset M68HC11
1605 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1606 @end ifset
1607 @ifset POWERPC
1608 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1609 @end ifset
1610
1611 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1612 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1613 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1614 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1615 instructions, and combining constant values.
1616
1617 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1618 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1619 @ifset GENERIC
1620 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1621 family of processors.
1622 @end ifset
1623
1624 @ifset GENERIC
1625 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1626 but ignored.
1627 @end ifset
1628
1629 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1630 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1631
1632 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1633 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1634 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1635 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1636 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1637 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1638 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1639 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1640 @ifset GENERIC
1641 (such as VxWorks)
1642 @end ifset
1643 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1644 run-time memory.
1645
1646 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1647 or symbols needed for relocations.
1648
1649 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1650 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1651
1652 @ifset GENERIC
1653 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1654 @cindex runtime library search path
1655 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1656 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1657 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1658 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1659 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1660 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1661 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1662 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1663 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1664 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1665
1666 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1667 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1668 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1669 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1670 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1671 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1672 file systems.
1673
1674 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1675 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1676 the @option{-rpath} option.
1677 @end ifset
1678
1679 @ifset GENERIC
1680 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1681 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1682 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1683 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1684 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1685 of the input files.
1686
1687 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1688 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1689 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1690 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1691 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1692 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1693 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1694 appearing multiple times.
1695
1696 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1697 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1698 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1699 runtime linker would do.
1700
1701 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1702 libraries:
1703 @enumerate
1704 @item
1705 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1706 @item
1707 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1708 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1709 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1710 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1711 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1712 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1713 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1714 @item
1715 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1716 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1717 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1718 @item
1719 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1720 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1721 @item
1722 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1723 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1724 @item
1725 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1726 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1727 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1728 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1729 @item
1730 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1731 @item
1732 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1733 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1734 @end enumerate
1735
1736 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1737 warning and continue with the link.
1738 @end ifset
1739
1740 @kindex -shared
1741 @kindex -Bshareable
1742 @item -shared
1743 @itemx -Bshareable
1744 @cindex shared libraries
1745 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1746 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1747 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1748 undefined symbols in the link.
1749
1750 @kindex --sort-common
1751 @item --sort-common
1752 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1753 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1754 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1755 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1756 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1757 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1758 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1759 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1760
1761 @kindex --sort-section=name
1762 @item --sort-section=name
1763 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1764 patterns in the linker script.
1765
1766 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1767 @item --sort-section=alignment
1768 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1769 patterns in the linker script.
1770
1771 @kindex --split-by-file
1772 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1773 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1774 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1775 size of 1 if not given.
1776
1777 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1778 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1779 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1780 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1781 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1782 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1783 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1784 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1785 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1786 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1787 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1788 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1789
1790 @kindex --stats
1791 @item --stats
1792 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1793 as execution time and memory usage.
1794
1795 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1796 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1797 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1798 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1799 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1800
1801 @kindex --traditional-format
1802 @cindex traditional format
1803 @item --traditional-format
1804 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1805 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1806 use the traditional format instead.
1807
1808 @cindex dbx
1809 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1810 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1811 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1812 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1813 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1814 combine duplicate entries.
1815
1816 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1817 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1818 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1819 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1820 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1821 line.
1822 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1823 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1824 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1825 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1826 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1827
1828 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1829 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1830 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1831 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1832 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1833 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1834 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1835 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1836 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1837
1838 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1839 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1840 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1841 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1842 of the first byte of the text segment.
1843
1844 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1845 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1846 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1847 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1848 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1849 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1850
1851 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1852 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1853 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1854 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1855 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1856
1857 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1858 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1859 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1860 values for @samp{method}:
1861
1862 @table @samp
1863 @item ignore-all
1864 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1865
1866 @item report-all
1867 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1868
1869 @item ignore-in-object-files
1870 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1871 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1872
1873 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1874 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1875 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1876 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1877 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1878 command line.
1879 @end table
1880
1881 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1882 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1883
1884 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1885 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1886 can change this to a warning.
1887
1888 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1889 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1890 @item --dll-verbose
1891 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1892 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1893 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1894 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1895 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1896
1897 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1898 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1899 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1900 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1901 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1902 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1903 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1904 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1905 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1906 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1907 @xref{WIN32}.
1908
1909 @kindex --warn-common
1910 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1911 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1912 @item --warn-common
1913 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1914 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
1915 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1916 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1917 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
1918 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1919
1920 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1921
1922 @table @samp
1923 @item int i = 1;
1924 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1925 file.
1926
1927 @item extern int i;
1928 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1929 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1930 variable somewhere.
1931
1932 @item int i;
1933 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1934 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1935 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1936 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1937 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1938 a definition of the same variable.
1939 @end table
1940
1941 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1942 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1943 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1944 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1945 a common symbol.
1946
1947 @enumerate
1948 @item
1949 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1950 definition for the symbol.
1951 @smallexample
1952 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1953 overridden by definition
1954 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1955 @end smallexample
1956
1957 @item
1958 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1959 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1960 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1961 @smallexample
1962 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1963 overriding common
1964 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1965 @end smallexample
1966
1967 @item
1968 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1969 @smallexample
1970 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1971 of `@var{symbol}'
1972 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1973 @end smallexample
1974
1975 @item
1976 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1977 @smallexample
1978 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1979 overridden by larger common
1980 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1981 @end smallexample
1982
1983 @item
1984 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1985 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1986 encountered in a different order.
1987 @smallexample
1988 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1989 overriding smaller common
1990 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1991 @end smallexample
1992 @end enumerate
1993
1994 @kindex --warn-constructors
1995 @item --warn-constructors
1996 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1997 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1998 detect the use of global constructors.
1999
2000 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2001 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2002 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2003 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2004 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2005 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2006 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2007 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2008 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2009 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2010 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2011 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2012 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2013
2014 @kindex --warn-once
2015 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2016 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2017 @item --warn-once
2018 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2019 which refers to it.
2020
2021 @kindex --warn-section-align
2022 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2023 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2024 @item --warn-section-align
2025 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2026 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2027 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2028 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2029 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2030
2031 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2032 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2033 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2034
2035 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2036 @item --warn-alternate-em
2037 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2038
2039 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2040 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2041 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2042 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2043 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2044
2045 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2046 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2047 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2048 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2049
2050 @kindex --whole-archive
2051 @cindex including an entire archive
2052 @item --whole-archive
2053 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2054 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2055 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2056 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2057 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2058 library. This option may be used more than once.
2059
2060 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2061 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2062 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2063 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2064 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2065
2066 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2067 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2068 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2069 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2070 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2071 @var{symbol}.
2072
2073 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2074 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2075 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2076 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2077
2078 Here is a trivial example:
2079
2080 @smallexample
2081 void *
2082 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2083 @{
2084 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2085 return __real_malloc (c);
2086 @}
2087 @end smallexample
2088
2089 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2090 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2091 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2092 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2093
2094 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2095 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2096 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2097 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2098 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2099
2100 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2101 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2102 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2103 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2104
2105 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2106 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2107 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2108 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2109 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2110
2111 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2112 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2113 @item --enable-new-dtags
2114 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2115 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2116 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2117 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2118 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2119 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2120 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2121 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2122
2123 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2124 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2125 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2126 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2127 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2128 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2129 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2130
2131 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2132 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2133 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2134 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2135 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2136 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2137 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2138
2139 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2140 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2141 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2142 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2143 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2144 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2145
2146 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2147 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2148 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2149 has been used.
2150
2151 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2152 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2153
2154 @kindex --build-id
2155 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2156 @item --build-id
2157 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2158 Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2159 The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2160 file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2161 @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2162 parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2163 @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2164 @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2165 an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2166 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2167 omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2168
2169 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2170 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2171 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2172 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2173 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2174 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2175
2176 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2177 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2178 @end table
2179
2180 @c man end
2181
2182 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2183
2184 @c man begin OPTIONS
2185
2186 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2187 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2188 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2189 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2190 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2191 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2192 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2193 object file).
2194
2195 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2196 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2197 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2198 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2199
2200 @table @gcctabopt
2201
2202 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2203 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2204 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2205 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2206 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2207
2208 @kindex --base-file
2209 @item --base-file @var{file}
2210 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2211 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2212 @file{dlltool}.
2213 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2214
2215 @kindex --dll
2216 @item --dll
2217 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2218 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2219 file.
2220 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2221
2222 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2223 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2224 @item --enable-long-section-names
2225 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2226 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2227 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2228 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2229 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2230 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2231 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2232 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2233 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2234 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2235 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2236 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2237 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2238 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2239 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2240 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2241 image and not stripping symbols.
2242 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2243
2244 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2245 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2246 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2247 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2248 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2249 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2250 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2251 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2252 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2253 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2254 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2255 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2256 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2257 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2258 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2259 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2260 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2261 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2262
2263 @kindex --leading-underscore
2264 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2265 @item --leading-underscore
2266 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2267 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2268 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2269 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2270
2271 @cindex DLLs, creating
2272 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2273 @item --export-all-symbols
2274 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2275 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2276 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2277 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2278 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2279 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2280 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2281 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2282 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2283 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2284 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2285 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2286 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2287 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2288 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2289 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2290 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2291 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2292 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2293 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2294 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2295 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2296 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2297
2298 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2299 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2300 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2301 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2302 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2303
2304 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2305 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2306 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2307 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2308
2309 @kindex --file-alignment
2310 @item --file-alignment
2311 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2312 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2313 512.
2314 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2315
2316 @cindex heap size
2317 @kindex --heap
2318 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2319 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2320 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2321 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
2322 committed.
2323 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2324
2325 @cindex image base
2326 @kindex --image-base
2327 @item --image-base @var{value}
2328 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2329 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2330 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2331 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2332 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2333 for dlls.
2334 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2335
2336 @kindex --kill-at
2337 @item --kill-at
2338 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2339 symbols before they are exported.
2340 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2341
2342 @kindex --large-address-aware
2343 @item --large-address-aware
2344 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2345 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2346 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2347 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2348 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2349 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2350
2351 @kindex --major-image-version
2352 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2353 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2354 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2355
2356 @kindex --major-os-version
2357 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2358 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2359 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2360
2361 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2362 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2363 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2364 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2365
2366 @kindex --minor-image-version
2367 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2368 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2369 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2370
2371 @kindex --minor-os-version
2372 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2373 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2374 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2375
2376 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2377 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2378 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2379 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2380
2381 @cindex DEF files, creating
2382 @cindex DLLs, creating
2383 @kindex --output-def
2384 @item --output-def @var{file}
2385 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2386 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2387 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2388 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2389 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2390 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2391
2392 @cindex DLLs, creating
2393 @kindex --out-implib
2394 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2395 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2396 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2397 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2398 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2399 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2400 creation step.
2401 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2402
2403 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2404 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2405 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2406 using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2407 from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2408 collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2409 avoided.
2410 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2411
2412 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2413 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2414 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2415 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2416 default.
2417 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2418
2419 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2420 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2421 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2422 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2423 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2424 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2425 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2426 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2427 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2428 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2429
2430 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2431 @item --enable-auto-import
2432 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2433 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2434 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2435 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2436 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2437 specification published by Microsoft.
2438
2439 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2440 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2441 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2442 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2443 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2444
2445 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2446 see this message:
2447
2448 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2449 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2450
2451 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2452 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2453 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2454 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2455 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2456 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2457 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2458 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2459 the warning, and exit.
2460
2461 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2462 data type of the exported variable:
2463
2464 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2465 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2466 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2467
2468 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2469 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2470 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2471 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2472
2473 @example
2474 extern type extern_array[];
2475 extern_array[1] -->
2476 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2477 @end example
2478
2479 or
2480
2481 @example
2482 extern type extern_array[];
2483 extern_array[1] -->
2484 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2485 @end example
2486
2487 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2488 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2489
2490 @example
2491 extern struct s extern_struct;
2492 extern_struct.field -->
2493 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2494 @end example
2495
2496 or
2497
2498 @example
2499 extern long long extern_ll;
2500 extern_ll -->
2501 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2502 @end example
2503
2504 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2505 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2506 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2507 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2508 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2509 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2510 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2511 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2512
2513 Original:
2514 @example
2515 --foo.h
2516 extern int arr[];
2517 --foo.c
2518 #include "foo.h"
2519 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2520 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2521 @}
2522 @end example
2523
2524 Solution 1:
2525 @example
2526 --foo.h
2527 extern int arr[];
2528 --foo.c
2529 #include "foo.h"
2530 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2531 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2532 volatile int *parr = arr;
2533 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2534 @}
2535 @end example
2536
2537 Solution 2:
2538 @example
2539 --foo.h
2540 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2541 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2542 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2543 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2544 #else
2545 #define FOO_IMPORT
2546 #endif
2547 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2548 --foo.c
2549 #include "foo.h"
2550 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2551 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2552 @}
2553 @end example
2554
2555 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2556 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2557 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2558 functions).
2559 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2560
2561 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2562 @item --disable-auto-import
2563 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2564 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2565 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2566
2567 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2568 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2569 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2570 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2571 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2572 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2573 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2574
2575 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2576 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2577 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2578 DLLs.
2579 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2580
2581 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2582 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2583 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2584 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2585
2586 @kindex --section-alignment
2587 @item --section-alignment
2588 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2589 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2590 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2591
2592 @cindex stack size
2593 @kindex --stack
2594 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2595 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2596 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2597 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
2598 committed.
2599 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2600
2601 @kindex --subsystem
2602 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2603 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2604 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2605 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2606 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2607 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2608 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2609 @var{which}.
2610 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2611
2612 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2613 of the PE file header:
2614 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2615
2616 @kindex --dynamicbase
2617 @item --dynamicbase
2618 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2619 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2620 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2621
2622 @kindex --forceinteg
2623 @item --forceinteg
2624 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2625
2626 @kindex --nxcompat
2627 @item --nxcompat
2628 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2629 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2630
2631 @kindex --no-isolation
2632 @item --no-isolation
2633 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2634
2635 @kindex --no-seh
2636 @item --no-seh
2637 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2638 this image.
2639
2640 @kindex --no-bind
2641 @item --no-bind
2642 Do not bind this image.
2643
2644 @kindex --wdmdriver
2645 @item --wdmdriver
2646 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2647
2648 @kindex --tsaware
2649 @item --tsaware
2650 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2651
2652 @end table
2653
2654 @c man end
2655
2656 @ifset C6X
2657 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2658
2659 @c man begin OPTIONS
2660
2661 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2662 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2663 all executables use an index of 0.
2664
2665 @table @gcctabopt
2666
2667 @kindex --dsbt-size
2668 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2669 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2670 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2671 entries.
2672
2673 @kindex --dsbt-index
2674 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2675 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2676 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2677 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2678 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2679
2680 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2681 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2682 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2683
2684 @end table
2685
2686 @c man end
2687 @end ifset
2688
2689 @ifset M68HC11
2690 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2691
2692 @c man begin OPTIONS
2693
2694 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2695 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2696
2697 @table @gcctabopt
2698
2699 @kindex --no-trampoline
2700 @item --no-trampoline
2701 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2702 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2703 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2704
2705 @kindex --bank-window
2706 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2707 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2708 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2709 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2710 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2711
2712 @end table
2713
2714 @c man end
2715 @end ifset
2716
2717 @ifset M68K
2718 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2719
2720 @c man begin OPTIONS
2721
2722 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2723 when linking for 68K targets.
2724
2725 @table @gcctabopt
2726
2727 @kindex --got
2728 @item --got=@var{type}
2729 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2730 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2731 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2732 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2733
2734 @end table
2735
2736 @c man end
2737 @end ifset
2738
2739 @ifset MIPS
2740 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2741
2742 @c man begin OPTIONS
2743
2744 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2745 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2746
2747 @table @gcctabopt
2748
2749 @kindex --insn32
2750 @item --insn32
2751 @kindex --no-insn32
2752 @itemx --no-insn32
2753 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2754 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2755 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2756 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2757 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2758 possible.
2759
2760 @end table
2761
2762 @c man end
2763 @end ifset
2764
2765 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2766 @node Environment
2767 @section Environment Variables
2768
2769 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2770
2771 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2772 @ifclear SingleFormat
2773 @code{GNUTARGET},
2774 @end ifclear
2775 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2776
2777 @ifclear SingleFormat
2778 @kindex GNUTARGET
2779 @cindex default input format
2780 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2781 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2782 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2783 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2784 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2785 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2786 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2787 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2788 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2789 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2790 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2791 @end ifclear
2792
2793 @kindex LDEMULATION
2794 @cindex default emulation
2795 @cindex emulation, default
2796 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2797 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2798 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2799 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2800 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2801 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2802 linker was configured.
2803
2804 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2805 @cindex demangling, default
2806 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2807 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2808 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2809 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2810 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2811 options.
2812
2813 @c man end
2814 @end ifset
2815
2816 @node Scripts
2817 @chapter Linker Scripts
2818
2819 @cindex scripts
2820 @cindex linker scripts
2821 @cindex command files
2822 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2823 written in the linker command language.
2824
2825 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2826 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2827 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2828 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2829 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2830 described below.
2831
2832 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2833 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2834 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2835 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2836 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2837
2838 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2839 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2840 default linker script.
2841
2842 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2843 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2844 Linker Scripts}.
2845
2846 @menu
2847 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2848 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2849 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2850 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2851 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2852 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2853 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2854 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2855 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2856 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2857 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2858 @end menu
2859
2860 @node Basic Script Concepts
2861 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2862 @cindex linker script concepts
2863 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2864 describe the linker script language.
2865
2866 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2867 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2868 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2869 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2870 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2871 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2872 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2873 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2874
2875 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2876 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2877 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
2878 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2879 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2880 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2881 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2882 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2883 of debugging information.
2884
2885 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2886 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2887 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2888 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2889 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2890 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2891 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2892 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2893 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2894 RAM address would be the VMA.
2895
2896 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2897 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2898
2899 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2900 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2901 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2902 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2903 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2904 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2905 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2906
2907 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2908 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2909 option.
2910
2911 @node Script Format
2912 @section Linker Script Format
2913 @cindex linker script format
2914 Linker scripts are text files.
2915
2916 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2917 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2918 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2919 generally ignored.
2920
2921 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2922 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2923 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2924 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2925 file name.
2926
2927 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2928 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2929 to whitespace.
2930
2931 @node Simple Example
2932 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2933 @cindex linker script example
2934 @cindex example of linker script
2935 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2936
2937 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2938 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2939 memory layout of the output file.
2940
2941 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2942 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2943 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2944 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2945 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2946 your input files.
2947
2948 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2949 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2950 linker script which will do that:
2951 @smallexample
2952 SECTIONS
2953 @{
2954 . = 0x10000;
2955 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2956 . = 0x8000000;
2957 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2958 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2959 @}
2960 @end smallexample
2961
2962 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2963 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2964 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2965
2966 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2967 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2968 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2969 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2970 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2971 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2972 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2973
2974 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2975 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2976 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2977 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2978 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2979 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2980
2981 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2982 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2983 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2984
2985 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2986 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2987 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2988 output section, the value of the location counter will be
2989 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2990 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
2991 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
2992
2993 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2994 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2995 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2996 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2997 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2998 sections.
2999
3000 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3001
3002 @node Simple Commands
3003 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3004 @cindex linker script simple commands
3005 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3006
3007 @menu
3008 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3009 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3010 @ifclear SingleFormat
3011 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3012 @end ifclear
3013
3014 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3015 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3016 @end menu
3017
3018 @node Entry Point
3019 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3020 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3021 @cindex start of execution
3022 @cindex first instruction
3023 @cindex entry point
3024 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3025 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3026 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3027 @smallexample
3028 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3029 @end smallexample
3030
3031 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3032 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3033 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3034 @itemize @bullet
3035 @item
3036 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3037 @item
3038 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3039 @item
3040 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3041 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3042 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3043 @item
3044 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3045 @item
3046 The address @code{0}.
3047 @end itemize
3048
3049 @node File Commands
3050 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3051 @cindex linker script file commands
3052 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3053
3054 @table @code
3055 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3056 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3057 @cindex including a linker script
3058 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3059 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3060 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3061 10 levels deep.
3062
3063 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3064 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3065
3066 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3067 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3068 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3069 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3070 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3071 @cindex linker script input object files
3072 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3073 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3074
3075 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3076 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3077 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3078
3079 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3080 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3081
3082 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3083 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3084 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3085 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3086 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3087 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3088 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3089
3090 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3091 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3092 @samp{-l}.
3093
3094 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3095 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3096 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3097
3098 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3099 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3100 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3101 @cindex grouping input files
3102 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3103 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3104 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3105 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3106
3107 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3108 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3109 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3110 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3111 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3112 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3113 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3114 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3115 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3116 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3117 setting afterwards.
3118
3119 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3120 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3121 @cindex output file name in linker script
3122 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3123 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3124 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3125 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3126 precedence.
3127
3128 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3129 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3130
3131 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3132 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3133 @cindex library search path in linker script
3134 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3135 @cindex search path in linker script
3136 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3137 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3138 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3139 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3140 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3141 the command line option are searched first.
3142
3143 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3144 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3145 @cindex first input file
3146 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3147 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3148 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3149 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3150 first file.
3151 @end table
3152
3153 @ifclear SingleFormat
3154 @node Format Commands
3155 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3156 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3157
3158 @table @code
3159 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3160 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3161 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3162 @cindex output file format in linker script
3163 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3164 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3165 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3166 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3167 line option takes precedence.
3168
3169 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3170 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3171 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3172 desired endianness.
3173
3174 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3175 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3176 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3177 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3178
3179 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3180 command:
3181 @smallexample
3182 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3183 @end smallexample
3184 This says that the default format for the output file is
3185 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3186 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3187 format.
3188
3189 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3190 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3191 @cindex input file format in linker script
3192 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3193 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3194 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3195 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3196 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3197 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3198 @end table
3199 @end ifclear
3200
3201 @node REGION_ALIAS
3202 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3203 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3204 @cindex region alias
3205 @cindex region names
3206
3207 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3208 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3209
3210 @smallexample
3211 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3212 @end smallexample
3213
3214 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3215 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3216 to memory regions. An example follows.
3217
3218 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3219 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3220 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3221 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3222 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3223 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3224 sections:
3225
3226 @itemize @bullet
3227 @item
3228 @code{.text} program code;
3229 @item
3230 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3231 @item
3232 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3233 @item
3234 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3235 @end itemize
3236
3237 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3238 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3239 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3240 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3241 @code{C}:
3242 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3243 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3244 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3245 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3246 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3247 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3248 @end multitable
3249 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3250 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3251 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3252 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3253
3254 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3255 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3256 memory layout:
3257 @smallexample
3258 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3259
3260 SECTIONS
3261 @{
3262 .text :
3263 @{
3264 *(.text)
3265 @} > REGION_TEXT
3266 .rodata :
3267 @{
3268 *(.rodata)
3269 rodata_end = .;
3270 @} > REGION_RODATA
3271 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3272 @{
3273 data_start = .;
3274 *(.data)
3275 @} > REGION_DATA
3276 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3277 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3278 .bss :
3279 @{
3280 *(.bss)
3281 @} > REGION_BSS
3282 @}
3283 @end smallexample
3284
3285 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3286 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3287 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3288 @table @code
3289 @item A
3290 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3291 @smallexample
3292 MEMORY
3293 @{
3294 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3295 @}
3296
3297 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3298 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3299 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3300 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3301 @end smallexample
3302 @item B
3303 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3304 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3305 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3306 @smallexample
3307 MEMORY
3308 @{
3309 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3310 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3311 @}
3312
3313 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3314 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3315 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3316 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3317 @end smallexample
3318 @item C
3319 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3320 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3321 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3322 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3323 @smallexample
3324 MEMORY
3325 @{
3326 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3327 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3328 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3329 @}
3330
3331 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3332 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3333 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3334 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3335 @end smallexample
3336 @end table
3337
3338 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3339 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3340 necessary:
3341 @smallexample
3342 #include <string.h>
3343
3344 extern char data_start [];
3345 extern char data_size [];
3346 extern char data_load_start [];
3347
3348 void copy_data(void)
3349 @{
3350 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3351 @{
3352 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3353 @}
3354 @}
3355 @end smallexample
3356
3357 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3358 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3359 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3360
3361 @table @code
3362 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3363 @kindex ASSERT
3364 @cindex assertion in linker script
3365 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3366 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3367
3368 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3369 @kindex EXTERN
3370 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3371 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3372 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3373 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3374 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3375 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3376
3377 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3378 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3379 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3380 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3381 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3382 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3383
3384 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3385 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3386 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3387 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3388 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3389 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3390
3391 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3392 @kindex INSERT
3393 @cindex insert user script into default script
3394 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3395 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3396 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3397 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3398 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3399 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3400 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3401 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3402 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3403 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3404 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3405 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3406 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3407
3408 @smallexample
3409 SECTIONS
3410 @{
3411 OVERLAY :
3412 @{
3413 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3414 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3415 @}
3416 @}
3417 INSERT AFTER .text;
3418 @end smallexample
3419
3420 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3421 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3422 @cindex cross references
3423 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3424 references among certain output sections.
3425
3426 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3427 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3428 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3429 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3430 a function defined in the other section.
3431
3432 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3433 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3434 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3435 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3436 names.
3437
3438 @ifclear SingleFormat
3439 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3440 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3441 @cindex machine architecture
3442 @cindex architecture
3443 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3444 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3445 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3446 the @samp{-f} option.
3447 @end ifclear
3448
3449 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3450 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3451 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3452 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3453 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3454 @xref{Expression Section}.
3455 @end table
3456
3457 @node Assignments
3458 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3459 @cindex assignment in scripts
3460 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3461 @cindex variables, defining
3462 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3463 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3464
3465 @menu
3466 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3467 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3468 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3469 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3470 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3471 @end menu
3472
3473 @node Simple Assignments
3474 @subsection Simple Assignments
3475
3476 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3477
3478 @table @code
3479 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3480 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3481 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3482 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3483 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3484 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3485 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3486 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3487 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3488 @end table
3489
3490 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3491 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3492 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3493
3494 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3495 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3496
3497 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3498
3499 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3500
3501 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3502 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3503 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3504
3505 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3506 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3507
3508 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3509 assignments may be used:
3510
3511 @smallexample
3512 floating_point = 0;
3513 SECTIONS
3514 @{
3515 .text :
3516 @{
3517 *(.text)
3518 _etext = .;
3519 @}
3520 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3521 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3522 @}
3523 @end smallexample
3524 @noindent
3525 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3526 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3527 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3528 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3529 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3530
3531 @node HIDDEN
3532 @subsection HIDDEN
3533 @cindex HIDDEN
3534 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3535 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3536
3537 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3538 @code{HIDDEN}:
3539
3540 @smallexample
3541 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3542 SECTIONS
3543 @{
3544 .text :
3545 @{
3546 *(.text)
3547 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3548 @}
3549 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3550 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3551 @}
3552 @end smallexample
3553 @noindent
3554 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3555
3556 @node PROVIDE
3557 @subsection PROVIDE
3558 @cindex PROVIDE
3559 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3560 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3561 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3562 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3563 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3564 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3565 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3566 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3567
3568 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3569 @smallexample
3570 SECTIONS
3571 @{
3572 .text :
3573 @{
3574 *(.text)
3575 _etext = .;
3576 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3577 @}
3578 @}
3579 @end smallexample
3580
3581 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3582 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3583 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3584 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3585 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3586 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3587
3588 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3589 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3590 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3591 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3592 hidden and won't be exported.
3593
3594 @node Source Code Reference
3595 @subsection Source Code Reference
3596
3597 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3598 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3599 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3600 symbol that does not have a value.
3601
3602 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3603 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3604 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3605 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3606 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3607 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3608 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3609 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3610
3611 @smallexample
3612 extern int foo;
3613 @end smallexample
3614
3615 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3616
3617 @smallexample
3618 _foo = 1000;
3619 @end smallexample
3620
3621 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3622 transformation has taken place.
3623
3624 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3625 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3626 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3627 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3628 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3629 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3630 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3631
3632 @smallexample
3633 int foo = 1000;
3634 @end smallexample
3635
3636 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3637 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3638 number 1000 is initially stored.
3639
3640 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3641 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3642 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3643 So:
3644
3645 @smallexample
3646 foo = 1;
3647 @end smallexample
3648
3649 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3650 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3651 address. Whereas:
3652
3653 @smallexample
3654 int * a = & foo;
3655 @end smallexample
3656
3657 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3658 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3659 the variable @samp{a}.
3660
3661 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3662 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3663 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3664
3665 @smallexample
3666 foo = 1000;
3667 @end smallexample
3668
3669 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3670 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3671 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3672 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3673 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3674
3675 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3676 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3677 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3678 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3679 linker script contains these declarations:
3680
3681 @smallexample
3682 @group
3683 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3684 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3685 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3686 @end group
3687 @end smallexample
3688
3689 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3690
3691 @smallexample
3692 @group
3693 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3694
3695 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3696 @end group
3697 @end smallexample
3698
3699 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3700
3701 @node SECTIONS
3702 @section SECTIONS Command
3703 @kindex SECTIONS
3704 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3705 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3706
3707 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3708 @smallexample
3709 SECTIONS
3710 @{
3711 @var{sections-command}
3712 @var{sections-command}
3713 @dots{}
3714 @}
3715 @end smallexample
3716
3717 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3718
3719 @itemize @bullet
3720 @item
3721 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3722 @item
3723 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3724 @item
3725 an output section description
3726 @item
3727 an overlay description
3728 @end itemize
3729
3730 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3731 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3732 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3733 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3734 the layout of the output file.
3735
3736 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3737 below.
3738
3739 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3740 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3741 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3742 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3743 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3744 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3745
3746 @menu
3747 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3748 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3749 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3750 * Input Section:: Input section description
3751 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3752 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3753 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3754 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3755 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3756 @end menu
3757
3758 @node Output Section Description
3759 @subsection Output Section Description
3760 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3761 @smallexample
3762 @group
3763 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3764 [AT(@var{lma})]
3765 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3766 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3767 [@var{constraint}]
3768 @{
3769 @var{output-section-command}
3770 @var{output-section-command}
3771 @dots{}
3772 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3773 @end group
3774 @end smallexample
3775
3776 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3777
3778 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3779 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3780 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3781
3782 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3783
3784 @itemize @bullet
3785 @item
3786 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3787 @item
3788 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3789 @item
3790 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3791 @item
3792 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3793 @end itemize
3794
3795 @node Output Section Name
3796 @subsection Output Section Name
3797 @cindex name, section
3798 @cindex section name
3799 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3800 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3801 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3802 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3803 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3804 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3805 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3806 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3807 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3808 commas must be quoted.
3809
3810 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3811 Discarding}.
3812
3813 @node Output Section Address
3814 @subsection Output Section Address
3815 @cindex address, section
3816 @cindex section address
3817 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3818 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3819 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3820
3821 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3822 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3823 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3824 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3825 contained within the output section.
3826
3827 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3828
3829 @itemize @bullet
3830 @item
3831 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3832 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3833 in that region.
3834
3835 @item
3836 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3837 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3838 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3839 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3840
3841 @item
3842 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3843 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3844 counter.
3845 @end itemize
3846
3847 @noindent
3848 For example:
3849
3850 @smallexample
3851 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3852 @end smallexample
3853
3854 @noindent
3855 and
3856
3857 @smallexample
3858 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3859 @end smallexample
3860
3861 @noindent
3862 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3863 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3864 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3865 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3866 input sections.
3867
3868 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3869 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3870 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3871 do something like this:
3872 @smallexample
3873 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3874 @end smallexample
3875 @noindent
3876 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3877 aligned upward to the specified value.
3878
3879 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3880 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3881 sections are ignored).
3882
3883 @node Input Section
3884 @subsection Input Section Description
3885 @cindex input sections
3886 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3887 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3888
3889 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3890 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3891 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3892 map the input files into your memory layout.
3893
3894 @menu
3895 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3896 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3897 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3898 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3899 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3900 @end menu
3901
3902 @node Input Section Basics
3903 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3904 @cindex input section basics
3905 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3906 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3907
3908 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3909 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3910
3911 The most common input section description is to include all input
3912 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3913 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3914 @smallexample
3915 *(.text)
3916 @end smallexample
3917 @noindent
3918 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3919 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3920 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3921 example:
3922 @smallexample
3923 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3924 @end smallexample
3925 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3926 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3927
3928 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3929 @smallexample
3930 *(.text .rdata)
3931 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3932 @end smallexample
3933 @noindent
3934 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3935 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3936 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3937 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3938 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3939 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3940
3941 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3942 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3943 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3944 @smallexample
3945 data.o(.data)
3946 @end smallexample
3947
3948 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3949 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3950
3951 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3952
3953 @smallexample
3954 @group
3955 SECTIONS @{
3956 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3957 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3958 @}
3959 @end group
3960 @end smallexample
3961
3962 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3963 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3964 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3965 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3966 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3967
3968 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3969 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3970 with no whitespace around the colon.
3971
3972 @table @samp
3973 @item archive:file
3974 matches file within archive
3975 @item archive:
3976 matches the whole archive
3977 @item :file
3978 matches file but not one in an archive
3979 @end table
3980
3981 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3982 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3983 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3984 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3985 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3986 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3987 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3988 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3989 command.
3990
3991 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3992 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3993 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3994 @smallexample
3995 data.o
3996 @end smallexample
3997
3998 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3999 and does not contain any wild card
4000 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4001 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4002 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4003 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4004 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4005 the archive search path.
4006
4007 @node Input Section Wildcards
4008 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4009 @cindex input section wildcards
4010 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4011 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4012 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4013 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4014 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4015
4016 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4017 pattern for the file name.
4018
4019 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4020
4021 @table @samp
4022 @item *
4023 matches any number of characters
4024 @item ?
4025 matches any single character
4026 @item [@var{chars}]
4027 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4028 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4029 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4030 @item \
4031 quotes the following character
4032 @end table
4033
4034 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4035 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4036 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4037 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4038 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4039 a @samp{/} character.
4040
4041 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4042 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4043 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4044
4045 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4046 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4047 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4048 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4049 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4050 @smallexample
4051 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4052 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4053 @end smallexample
4054
4055 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4056 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4057 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4058 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4059 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4060 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4061 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4062
4063 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4064 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4065 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4066 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4067 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4068 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4069
4070 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4071 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4072 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4073 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4074 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4075
4076 @cindex SORT
4077 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4078
4079 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4080 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4081
4082 @enumerate
4083 @item
4084 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4085 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4086 sections have the same name.
4087 @item
4088 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4089 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4090 sections have the same alignment.
4091 @item
4092 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4093 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4094 @item
4095 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4096 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4097 @item
4098 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4099 @end enumerate
4100
4101 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4102 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4103 takes precedence over the command line option.
4104
4105 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4106 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4107 treated as nested sorting command.
4108
4109 @enumerate
4110 @item
4111 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4112 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4113 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4114 @item
4115 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4116 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4117 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4118 @end enumerate
4119
4120 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4121 command line option will be ignored.
4122
4123 @cindex SORT_NONE
4124 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4125 section sorting option.
4126
4127 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4128 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4129 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4130
4131 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4132 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4133 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4134 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4135 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4136 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4137 @smallexample
4138 @group
4139 SECTIONS @{
4140 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4141 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4142 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4143 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4144 @}
4145 @end group
4146 @end smallexample
4147
4148 @node Input Section Common
4149 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4150 @cindex common symbol placement
4151 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4152 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4153 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4154 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4155 named @samp{COMMON}.
4156
4157 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4158 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4159 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4160 input files are placed in another section.
4161
4162 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4163 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4164 @smallexample
4165 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4166 @end smallexample
4167
4168 @cindex scommon section
4169 @cindex small common symbols
4170 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4171 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4172 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4173 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4174 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4175 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4176 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4177 locations.
4178
4179 @cindex [COMMON]
4180 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4181 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4182 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4183
4184 @node Input Section Keep
4185 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4186 @cindex KEEP
4187 @cindex garbage collection
4188 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4189 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4190 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4191 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4192 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4193
4194 @node Input Section Example
4195 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4196 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4197 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4198 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4199 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4200 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4201 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4202 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4203 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4204 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4205
4206 @smallexample
4207 @group
4208 SECTIONS @{
4209 outputa 0x10000 :
4210 @{
4211 all.o
4212 foo.o (.input1)
4213 @}
4214 @end group
4215 @group
4216 outputb :
4217 @{
4218 foo.o (.input2)
4219 foo1.o (.input1)
4220 @}
4221 @end group
4222 @group
4223 outputc :
4224 @{
4225 *(.input1)
4226 *(.input2)
4227 @}
4228 @}
4229 @end group
4230 @end smallexample
4231
4232 @node Output Section Data
4233 @subsection Output Section Data
4234 @cindex data
4235 @cindex section data
4236 @cindex output section data
4237 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4238 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4239 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4240 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4241 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4242 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4243 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4244 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4245 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4246 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4247 counter.
4248
4249 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4250 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4251 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4252 stored.
4253
4254 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4255 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4256 @smallexample
4257 BYTE(1)
4258 LONG(addr)
4259 @end smallexample
4260
4261 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4262 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4263 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4264 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4265 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4266
4267 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4268 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4269 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4270 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4271 endianness of the first input object file.
4272
4273 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4274 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4275 @smallexample
4276 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4277 @end smallexample
4278 whereas this will work:
4279 @smallexample
4280 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4281 @end smallexample
4282
4283 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4284 @cindex holes, filling
4285 @cindex unspecified memory
4286 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4287 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4288 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4289 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4290 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4291 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4292 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4293 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4294 different parts of an output section.
4295
4296 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4297 value @samp{0x90}:
4298 @smallexample
4299 FILL(0x90909090)
4300 @end smallexample
4301
4302 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4303 section attribute, but it only affects the
4304 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4305 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4306 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4307 expression.
4308
4309 @node Output Section Keywords
4310 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4311 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4312 commands.
4313
4314 @table @code
4315 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4316 @cindex input filename symbols
4317 @cindex filename symbols
4318 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4319 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4320 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4321 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4322 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4323
4324 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4325 normally used for any other object file format.
4326
4327 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4328 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4329 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4330 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4331 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4332 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4333 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4334 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4335 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4336 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4337 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4338 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4339 ignored for other object file formats.
4340
4341 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4342 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4343 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4344 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4345 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4346 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4347 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4348 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4349 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4350 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4351 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4352 @code{exit}.
4353
4354 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4355 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4356 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4357 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4358 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4359 runtime code expects to see.
4360
4361 @smallexample
4362 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4363 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4364 *(.ctors)
4365 LONG(0)
4366 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4367 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4368 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4369 *(.dtors)
4370 LONG(0)
4371 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4372 @end smallexample
4373
4374 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4375 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4376 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4377 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4378 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4379 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4380 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4381 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4382
4383 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4384 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4385 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4386 scripts.
4387
4388 @end table
4389
4390 @node Output Section Discarding
4391 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4392 @cindex discarding sections
4393 @cindex sections, discarding
4394 @cindex removing sections
4395 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4396 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4397 be present in any of the input files. For example:
4398 @smallexample
4399 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4400 @end smallexample
4401 @noindent
4402 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4403 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4404 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4405 space in an output section will also create the output section.
4406
4407 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4408 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4409 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4410 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4411 section is discarded.
4412
4413 @cindex /DISCARD/
4414 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4415 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4416 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4417
4418 @node Output Section Attributes
4419 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4420 @cindex output section attributes
4421 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4422 like this:
4423
4424 @smallexample
4425 @group
4426 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4427 [AT(@var{lma})]
4428 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4429 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4430 [@var{constraint}]
4431 @{
4432 @var{output-section-command}
4433 @var{output-section-command}
4434 @dots{}
4435 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4436 @end group
4437 @end smallexample
4438
4439 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4440 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4441 remaining section attributes.
4442
4443 @menu
4444 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4445 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4446 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4447 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4448 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4449 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4450 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4451 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4452 @end menu
4453
4454 @node Output Section Type
4455 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4456 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4457 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4458
4459 @table @code
4460 @item NOLOAD
4461 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4462 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4463 @item DSECT
4464 @itemx COPY
4465 @itemx INFO
4466 @itemx OVERLAY
4467 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4468 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4469 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4470 section when the program is run.
4471 @end table
4472
4473 @kindex NOLOAD
4474 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4475 @cindex loading, preventing
4476 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4477 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4478 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4479 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4480 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4481 @smallexample
4482 @group
4483 SECTIONS @{
4484 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4485 @dots{}
4486 @}
4487 @end group
4488 @end smallexample
4489
4490 @node Output Section LMA
4491 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4492 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4493 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4494 @cindex load address
4495 @cindex section load address
4496 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4497 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4498 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4499 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4500 address is optional.
4501
4502 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4503 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4504 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4505 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4506 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4507
4508 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4509 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4510 load address:
4511
4512 @itemize @bullet
4513 @item
4514 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4515 the LMA address as well.
4516
4517 @item
4518 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4519
4520 @item
4521 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4522 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4523 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4524 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4525 the last section in the located region.
4526
4527 @item
4528 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4529 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4530
4531 @item
4532 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4533 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4534 @end itemize
4535
4536 @cindex ROM initialized data
4537 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4538 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4539 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4540 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4541 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4542 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4543 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4544 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4545 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4546
4547 @smallexample
4548 @group
4549 SECTIONS
4550 @{
4551 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4552 .mdata 0x2000 :
4553 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4554 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4555 .bss 0x3000 :
4556 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4557 @}
4558 @end group
4559 @end smallexample
4560
4561 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4562 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4563 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4564 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4565 script.
4566
4567 @smallexample
4568 @group
4569 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4570 char *src = &_etext;
4571 char *dst = &_data;
4572
4573 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4574 while (dst < &_edata)
4575 *dst++ = *src++;
4576
4577 /* Zero bss. */
4578 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4579 *dst = 0;
4580 @end group
4581 @end smallexample
4582
4583 @node Forced Output Alignment
4584 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4585 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4586 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4587 @cindex output section alignment
4588 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4589 alternative you can force the output section alignment to the maximum alignment
4590 of all its input sections with ALIGN_WITH_INPUT. The alignment forced by
4591 ALIGN_WITH_INPUT is used even in case the load and virtual memory regions are
4592 different.
4593
4594 @node Forced Input Alignment
4595 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4596 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4597 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4598 @cindex input section alignment
4599 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4600 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4601 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4602
4603 @node Output Section Constraint
4604 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4605 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4606 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4607 @cindex constraints on output sections
4608 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4609 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4610 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4611 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4612
4613 @node Output Section Region
4614 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4615 @kindex >@var{region}
4616 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4617 @cindex memory regions and sections
4618 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4619 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4620
4621 Here is a simple example:
4622 @smallexample
4623 @group
4624 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4625 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4626 @end group
4627 @end smallexample
4628
4629 @node Output Section Phdr
4630 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4631 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4632 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4633 @cindex program headers and sections
4634 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4635 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4636 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4637 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4638 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4639 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4640
4641 Here is a simple example:
4642 @smallexample
4643 @group
4644 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4645 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4646 @end group
4647 @end smallexample
4648
4649 @node Output Section Fill
4650 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4651 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4652 @cindex section fill pattern
4653 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4654 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4655 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4656 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4657 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4658 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4659 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4660 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4661 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4662 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4663 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4664 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4665 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4666
4667 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4668 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4669
4670 Here is a simple example:
4671 @smallexample
4672 @group
4673 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4674 @end group
4675 @end smallexample
4676
4677 @node Overlay Description
4678 @subsection Overlay Description
4679 @kindex OVERLAY
4680 @cindex overlays
4681 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4682 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4683 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4684 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4685 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4686 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4687 than another.
4688
4689 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4690 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4691 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4692 command is as follows:
4693 @smallexample
4694 @group
4695 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4696 @{
4697 @var{secname1}
4698 @{
4699 @var{output-section-command}
4700 @var{output-section-command}
4701 @dots{}
4702 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4703 @var{secname2}
4704 @{
4705 @var{output-section-command}
4706 @var{output-section-command}
4707 @dots{}
4708 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4709 @dots{}
4710 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4711 @end group
4712 @end smallexample
4713
4714 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4715 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4716 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4717 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4718 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4719 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4720
4721 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4722 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4723 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4724 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4725 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4726 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4727
4728 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4729 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4730 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4731 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4732 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4733
4734 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4735 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4736 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4737 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4738 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4739 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4740 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4741
4742 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4743 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4744
4745 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4746 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4747 @smallexample
4748 @group
4749 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4750 @{
4751 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4752 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4753 @}
4754 @end group
4755 @end smallexample
4756 @noindent
4757 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4758 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4759 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4760 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4761 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4762 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4763
4764 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4765 like the following.
4766
4767 @smallexample
4768 @group
4769 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4770 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4771 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4772 @end group
4773 @end smallexample
4774
4775 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4776 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4777 example could have been written identically as follows.
4778
4779 @smallexample
4780 @group
4781 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4782 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4783 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4784 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4785 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4786 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4787 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4788 @end group
4789 @end smallexample
4790
4791 @node MEMORY
4792 @section MEMORY Command
4793 @kindex MEMORY
4794 @cindex memory regions
4795 @cindex regions of memory
4796 @cindex allocating memory
4797 @cindex discontinuous memory
4798 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4799 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4800
4801 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4802 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4803 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4804 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4805 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4806 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4807 around to fit into the available regions.
4808
4809 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4810 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4811 you wish. The syntax is:
4812 @smallexample
4813 @group
4814 MEMORY
4815 @{
4816 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4817 @dots{}
4818 @}
4819 @end group
4820 @end smallexample
4821
4822 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4823 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4824 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4825 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4826 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4827 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4828 command.
4829
4830 @cindex memory region attributes
4831 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4832 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4833 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4834 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4835 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4836 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4837 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4838
4839 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4840 @table @samp
4841 @item R
4842 Read-only section
4843 @item W
4844 Read/write section
4845 @item X
4846 Executable section
4847 @item A
4848 Allocatable section
4849 @item I
4850 Initialized section
4851 @item L
4852 Same as @samp{I}
4853 @item !
4854 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4855 @end table
4856
4857 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4858 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4859 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4860 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4861 attributes.
4862
4863 @kindex ORIGIN =
4864 @kindex o =
4865 @kindex org =
4866 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4867 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4868 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4869 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4870 @code{ORG}).
4871
4872 @kindex LENGTH =
4873 @kindex len =
4874 @kindex l =
4875 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4876 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4877 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4878 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4879
4880 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4881 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4882 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4883 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4884 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4885 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4886 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4887 region.
4888
4889 @smallexample
4890 @group
4891 MEMORY
4892 @{
4893 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4894 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4895 @}
4896 @end group
4897 @end smallexample
4898
4899 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4900 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4901 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4902 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4903 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4904 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4905 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4906 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4907 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4908
4909 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4910 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4911 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4912
4913 @smallexample
4914 @group
4915 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4916 @end group
4917 @end smallexample
4918
4919 @node PHDRS
4920 @section PHDRS Command
4921 @kindex PHDRS
4922 @cindex program headers
4923 @cindex ELF program headers
4924 @cindex program segments
4925 @cindex segments, ELF
4926 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4927 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4928 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4929 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4930
4931 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4932 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4933 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4934 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4935 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4936
4937 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4938 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4939 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4940 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4941 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4942
4943 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4944 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4945 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4946
4947 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4948 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4949
4950 @smallexample
4951 @group
4952 PHDRS
4953 @{
4954 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4955 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4956 @}
4957 @end group
4958 @end smallexample
4959
4960 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4961 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4962 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4963 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4964 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4965 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4966
4967 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4968 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4969 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4970 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4971 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4972 Section Phdr}.
4973
4974 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4975 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4976 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4977 contain the section.
4978
4979 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4980 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4981 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4982 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4983 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4984 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4985 segment at all.
4986
4987 @kindex FILEHDR
4988 @kindex PHDRS
4989 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
4990 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4991 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4992 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4993 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4994 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4995 these keywords.
4996
4997 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4998 value of the keyword.
4999
5000 @table @asis
5001 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5002 Indicates an unused program header.
5003
5004 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5005 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5006 the file.
5007
5008 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5009 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5010
5011 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5012 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5013 found.
5014
5015 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5016 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5017
5018 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5019 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5020 ABI.
5021
5022 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5023 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5024
5025 @item @var{expression}
5026 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5027 be used for types not defined above.
5028 @end table
5029
5030 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5031 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5032 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5033 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5034 output section attribute.
5035
5036 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5037 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5038 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5039 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5040 header.
5041
5042 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5043 headers used on a native ELF system.
5044
5045 @example
5046 @group
5047 PHDRS
5048 @{
5049 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5050 interp PT_INTERP ;
5051 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5052 data PT_LOAD ;
5053 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5054 @}
5055
5056 SECTIONS
5057 @{
5058 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5059 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5060 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5061 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5062 @dots{}
5063 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5064 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5065 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5066 @dots{}
5067 @}
5068 @end group
5069 @end example
5070
5071 @node VERSION
5072 @section VERSION Command
5073 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5074 @cindex symbol versions
5075 @cindex version script
5076 @cindex versions of symbols
5077 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5078 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5079 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5080 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5081 shared library.
5082
5083 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5084 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5085 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5086
5087 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5088 @smallexample
5089 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5090 @end smallexample
5091
5092 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5093 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5094 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5095 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5096 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5097 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5098 library.
5099
5100 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5101 examples.
5102
5103 @smallexample
5104 VERS_1.1 @{
5105 global:
5106 foo1;
5107 local:
5108 old*;
5109 original*;
5110 new*;
5111 @};
5112
5113 VERS_1.2 @{
5114 foo2;
5115 @} VERS_1.1;
5116
5117 VERS_2.0 @{
5118 bar1; bar2;
5119 extern "C++" @{
5120 ns::*;
5121 "f(int, double)";
5122 @};
5123 @} VERS_1.2;
5124 @end smallexample
5125
5126 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5127 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5128 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5129 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5130 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5131 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5132 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5133 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5134 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5135 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5136
5137 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5138 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5139 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5140
5141 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5142 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5143 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5144
5145 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5146 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5147 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5148 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5149 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5150 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5151 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5152 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5153 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5154
5155 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5156 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5157 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5158 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5159
5160 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5161 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5162 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5163 won't.
5164
5165 @smallexample
5166 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5167 @end smallexample
5168
5169 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5170 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5171 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5172 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5173 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5174 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5175 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5176 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5177 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5178 search for each symbol reference.
5179
5180 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5181 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5182 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5183 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5184 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5185 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5186 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5187 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5188 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5189
5190 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5191 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5192 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5193 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5194 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5195 @smallexample
5196 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5197 @end smallexample
5198 @noindent
5199 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5200 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5201 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5202 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5203 takes precedence over a version script.
5204
5205 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5206 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5207 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5208 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5209 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5210
5211 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5212 source file. Here is an example:
5213
5214 @smallexample
5215 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5216 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5217 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5218 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5219 @end smallexample
5220
5221 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5222 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5223 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5224 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5225
5226 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5227 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5228 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5229 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5230 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5231 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5232
5233 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5234 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5235 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5236 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5237
5238 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5239
5240 @smallexample
5241 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5242 @end smallexample
5243
5244 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5245 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5246 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5247 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5248 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5249
5250 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5251 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5252 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5253 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5254 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5255 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5256 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5257 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5258 expect when you upgrade.
5259
5260 @node Expressions
5261 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5262 @cindex expressions
5263 @cindex arithmetic
5264 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5265 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5266 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5267 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5268
5269 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5270
5271 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5272 expressions.
5273
5274 @menu
5275 * Constants:: Constants
5276 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5277 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5278 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5279 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5280 * Operators:: Operators
5281 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5282 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5283 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5284 @end menu
5285
5286 @node Constants
5287 @subsection Constants
5288 @cindex integer notation
5289 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5290 All constants are integers.
5291
5292 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5293 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5294 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5295 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5296 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5297 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5298
5299 @cindex scaled integers
5300 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5301 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5302 @cindex suffixes for integers
5303 @cindex integer suffixes
5304 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5305 constant by
5306 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5307 @ifnottex
5308 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5309 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5310 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5311 @end ifnottex
5312 @tex
5313 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5314 @end tex
5315 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5316 respectively. For example, the following
5317 all refer to the same quantity:
5318
5319 @smallexample
5320 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5321 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5322 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5323 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5324 @end smallexample
5325
5326 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5327 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5328
5329 @node Symbolic Constants
5330 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5331 @cindex symbolic constants
5332 @kindex CONSTANT
5333 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5334 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5335
5336 @table @code
5337 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5338 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5339 The target's maximum page size.
5340
5341 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5342 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5343 The target's default page size.
5344 @end table
5345
5346 So for example:
5347
5348 @smallexample
5349 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5350 @end smallexample
5351
5352 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5353 supported by the target.
5354
5355 @node Symbols
5356 @subsection Symbol Names
5357 @cindex symbol names
5358 @cindex names
5359 @cindex quoted symbol names
5360 @kindex "
5361 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5362 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5363 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5364 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5365 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5366 @smallexample
5367 "SECTION" = 9;
5368 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5369 @end smallexample
5370
5371 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5372 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5373 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5374
5375 @node Orphan Sections
5376 @subsection Orphan Sections
5377 @cindex orphan
5378 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5379 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5380 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5381 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5382 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5383 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5384 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5385 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5386 at the end of the file.
5387
5388 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5389 well as section flag.
5390
5391 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5392 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5393 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5394 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5395 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5396 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5397 character.
5398
5399 @node Location Counter
5400 @subsection The Location Counter
5401 @kindex .
5402 @cindex dot
5403 @cindex location counter
5404 @cindex current output location
5405 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5406 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5407 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5408 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5409 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5410
5411 @cindex holes
5412 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5413 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5414 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5415 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5416 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5417
5418 @smallexample
5419 SECTIONS
5420 @{
5421 output :
5422 @{
5423 file1(.text)
5424 . = . + 1000;
5425 file2(.text)
5426 . += 1000;
5427 file3(.text)
5428 @} = 0x12345678;
5429 @}
5430 @end smallexample
5431 @noindent
5432 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5433 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5434 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5435 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5436 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5437 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5438
5439 @cindex dot inside sections
5440 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5441 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5442 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5443 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5444 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5445 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5446
5447 @smallexample
5448 SECTIONS
5449 @{
5450 . = 0x100
5451 .text: @{
5452 *(.text)
5453 . = 0x200
5454 @}
5455 . = 0x500
5456 .data: @{
5457 *(.data)
5458 . += 0x600
5459 @}
5460 @}
5461 @end smallexample
5462
5463 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5464 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5465 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5466 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5467 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5468 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5469 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5470 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5471
5472 @cindex dot outside sections
5473 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5474 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5475 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5476
5477 @smallexample
5478 SECTIONS
5479 @{
5480 start_of_text = . ;
5481 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5482 end_of_text = . ;
5483
5484 start_of_data = . ;
5485 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5486 end_of_data = . ;
5487 @}
5488 @end smallexample
5489
5490 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5491 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5492 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5493 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5494 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5495 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5496 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5497 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5498 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5499 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5500 as follows:
5501
5502 @smallexample
5503 SECTIONS
5504 @{
5505 start_of_text = . ;
5506 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5507 end_of_text = . ;
5508
5509 start_of_data = . ;
5510 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5511 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5512 end_of_data = . ;
5513 @}
5514 @end smallexample
5515
5516 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5517 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5518 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5519 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5520 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5521 section. So you could write:
5522
5523 @smallexample
5524 SECTIONS
5525 @{
5526 start_of_text = . ;
5527 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5528 end_of_text = . ;
5529
5530 . = . ;
5531 start_of_data = . ;
5532 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5533 end_of_data = . ;
5534 @}
5535 @end smallexample
5536
5537 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5538 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5539
5540 @need 2000
5541 @node Operators
5542 @subsection Operators
5543 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5544 @cindex arithmetic operators
5545 @cindex precedence in expressions
5546 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5547 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5548 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5549 @ifnottex
5550 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5551 @smallexample
5552 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5553 (highest)
5554 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5555 2 left * / %
5556 3 left + -
5557 4 left >> <<
5558 5 left == != > < <= >=
5559 6 left &
5560 7 left |
5561 8 left &&
5562 9 left ||
5563 10 right ? :
5564 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5565 (lowest)
5566 @end smallexample
5567 Notes:
5568 (1) Prefix operators
5569 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5570 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5571 @end ifnottex
5572 @tex
5573 \vskip \baselineskip
5574 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5575 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5576 \hrule
5577 \halign
5578 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5579 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5580 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5581 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5582 \noalign{\hrule}
5583 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5584 &highest&&&&&\cr
5585 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5586 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5587 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5588 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5589 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5590 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5591 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5592 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5593 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5594 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5595 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5596 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5597 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5598 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5599 \hrule}
5600 @end tex
5601 @iftex
5602 {
5603 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5604 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5605 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5606 }
5607 @end iftex
5608 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5609
5610 @node Evaluation
5611 @subsection Evaluation
5612 @cindex lazy evaluation
5613 @cindex expression evaluation order
5614 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5615 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5616
5617 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5618 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5619 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5620 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5621
5622 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5623 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5624 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5625 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5626
5627 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5628 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5629 allocation.
5630
5631 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5632 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5633
5634 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5635 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5636 following
5637 @smallexample
5638 @group
5639 SECTIONS
5640 @{
5641 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5642 @{ *(.text) @}
5643 @}
5644 @end group
5645 @end smallexample
5646 @noindent
5647 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5648 address}.
5649
5650 @node Expression Section
5651 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5652 @cindex expression sections
5653 @cindex absolute expressions
5654 @cindex relative expressions
5655 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5656 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5657 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5658 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5659 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5660 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5661 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5662 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5663 operations.
5664
5665 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5666 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5667 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5668 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5669 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5670 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5671 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5672 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5673 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5674 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5675 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5676 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5677 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5678 everywhere.
5679
5680 In the following simple example,
5681
5682 @smallexample
5683 @group
5684 SECTIONS
5685 @{
5686 . = 0x100;
5687 __executable_start = 0x100;
5688 .data :
5689 @{
5690 . = 0x10;
5691 __data_start = 0x10;
5692 *(.data)
5693 @}
5694 @dots{}
5695 @}
5696 @end group
5697 @end smallexample
5698
5699 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5700 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5701 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5702 section in the second two assignments.
5703
5704 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5705 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5706
5707 @itemize @bullet
5708 @item
5709 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5710 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5711 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5712 @item
5713 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5714 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5715 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5716 @item
5717 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5718 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5719 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5720 before applying the operator.
5721 @end itemize
5722
5723 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5724
5725 @itemize @bullet
5726 @item
5727 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5728 @item
5729 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5730 @item
5731 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5732 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5733 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5734 @item
5735 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5736 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5737 section as the relative operand(s).
5738 @item
5739 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5740 conversions) is an absolute address.
5741 @end itemize
5742
5743 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5744 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5745 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5746 section @samp{.data}:
5747 @smallexample
5748 SECTIONS
5749 @{
5750 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5751 @}
5752 @end smallexample
5753 @noindent
5754 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5755 @samp{.data} section.
5756
5757 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5758 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5759
5760 @node Builtin Functions
5761 @subsection Builtin Functions
5762 @cindex functions in expressions
5763 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5764 use in linker script expressions.
5765
5766 @table @code
5767 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5768 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5769 @cindex expression, absolute
5770 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5771 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5772 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5773 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5774
5775 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5776 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5777 @cindex section address in expression
5778 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5779 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5780 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5781 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5782 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5783 the other two will be absolute:
5784 @smallexample
5785 @group
5786 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5787 .output1 :
5788 @{
5789 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5790 @dots{}
5791 @}
5792 .output :
5793 @{
5794 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5795 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5796 @}
5797 @dots{} @}
5798 @end group
5799 @end smallexample
5800
5801 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5802 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5803 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5804 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5805 @cindex round up location counter
5806 @cindex align location counter
5807 @cindex round up expression
5808 @cindex align expression
5809 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5810 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5811 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5812 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5813 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5814 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5815
5816 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5817 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5818 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5819 input sections:
5820 @smallexample
5821 @group
5822 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5823 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5824 *(.data)
5825 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5826 @}
5827 @dots{} @}
5828 @end group
5829 @end smallexample
5830 @noindent
5831 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5832 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5833 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5834 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5835
5836 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5837
5838 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5839 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5840 @cindex section alignment
5841 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5842 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5843 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5844 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5845 value in that section.
5846 @smallexample
5847 @group
5848 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5849 .output @{
5850 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5851 @dots{}
5852 @}
5853 @dots{} @}
5854 @end group
5855 @end smallexample
5856
5857 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5858 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5859 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5860 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5861 section.
5862
5863 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5864 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5865 This is equivalent to either
5866 @smallexample
5867 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5868 @end smallexample
5869 or
5870 @smallexample
5871 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5872 @end smallexample
5873 @noindent
5874 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5875 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5876 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5877 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5878 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5879 bytes in the on-disk file.
5880
5881 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5882 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5883 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5884 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5885 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5886
5887 @noindent
5888 Example:
5889 @smallexample
5890 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5891 @end smallexample
5892
5893 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5894 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5895 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5896 evaluation purposes.
5897
5898 @smallexample
5899 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5900 @end smallexample
5901
5902 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5903 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5904 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5905 @samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5906 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5907 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5908 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5909 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5910 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5911 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5912
5913 @smallexample
5914 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5915 @end smallexample
5916
5917 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5918 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5919 @cindex symbol defaults
5920 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5921 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5922 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5923 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5924 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5925 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5926 existed, its value is preserved:
5927
5928 @smallexample
5929 @group
5930 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5931 .text : @{
5932 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5933 @dots{}
5934 @}
5935 @dots{}
5936 @}
5937 @end group
5938 @end smallexample
5939
5940 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5941 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5942 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5943
5944 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5945 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5946 @cindex section load address in expression
5947 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
5948 Section LMA}).
5949
5950 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5951 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5952 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
5953 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
5954
5955 @kindex MAX
5956 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5957 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5958
5959 @kindex MIN
5960 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5961 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5962
5963 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5964 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5965 @cindex unallocated address, next
5966 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5967 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5968 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5969 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5970
5971 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5972 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5973 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5974
5975 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5976 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5977 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5978 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
5979 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
5980 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
5981 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5982 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5983 name.
5984
5985 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5986 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5987 @cindex section size
5988 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5989 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5990 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5991 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5992 @smallexample
5993 @group
5994 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5995 .output @{
5996 .start = . ;
5997 @dots{}
5998 .end = . ;
5999 @}
6000 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6001 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6002 @dots{} @}
6003 @end group
6004 @end smallexample
6005
6006 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6007 @itemx sizeof_headers
6008 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6009 @cindex header size
6010 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6011 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6012 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6013 choose, to facilitate paging.
6014
6015 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6016 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6017 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6018 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6019 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6020 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6021 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6022 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6023 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6024 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6025 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6026 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6027 @end table
6028
6029 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6030 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6031 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6032 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6033 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6034 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6035 linker will report an error.
6036
6037 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6038
6039 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6040 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6041 commands.
6042
6043 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6044 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6045 read. This can affect archive searching.
6046
6047 @ifset GENERIC
6048 @node Machine Dependent
6049 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6050
6051 @cindex machine dependencies
6052 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6053 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6054 functionality are not listed.
6055
6056 @menu
6057 @ifset H8300
6058 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6059 @end ifset
6060 @ifset I960
6061 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6062 @end ifset
6063 @ifset M68HC11
6064 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6065 @end ifset
6066 @ifset ARM
6067 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6068 @end ifset
6069 @ifset HPPA
6070 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6071 @end ifset
6072 @ifset M68K
6073 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6074 @end ifset
6075 @ifset MIPS
6076 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6077 @end ifset
6078 @ifset MMIX
6079 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6080 @end ifset
6081 @ifset MSP430
6082 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6083 @end ifset
6084 @ifset POWERPC
6085 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6086 @end ifset
6087 @ifset POWERPC64
6088 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6089 @end ifset
6090 @ifset SPU
6091 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6092 @end ifset
6093 @ifset TICOFF
6094 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6095 @end ifset
6096 @ifset WIN32
6097 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6098 @end ifset
6099 @ifset XTENSA
6100 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6101 @end ifset
6102 @end menu
6103 @end ifset
6104
6105 @ifset H8300
6106 @ifclear GENERIC
6107 @raisesections
6108 @end ifclear
6109
6110 @node H8/300
6111 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6112
6113 @cindex H8/300 support
6114 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6115 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6116
6117 @table @emph
6118 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6119 @item relaxing address modes
6120 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6121 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6122 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6123 respectively.
6124
6125 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6126 @item synthesizing instructions
6127 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6128 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6129 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6130 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6131 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6132 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6133 top page of memory).
6134
6135 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6136 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6137 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6138 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6139 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6140 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6141 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6142
6143 @item bit manipulation instructions
6144 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6145 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6146 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6147 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6148 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6149 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6150 the top page of memory).
6151
6152 @item system control instructions
6153 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6154 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6155 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6156 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6157 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6158 the top page of memory).
6159 @end table
6160
6161 @ifclear GENERIC
6162 @lowersections
6163 @end ifclear
6164 @end ifset
6165
6166 @ifclear GENERIC
6167 @ifset Renesas
6168 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6169 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6170 @node Renesas
6171 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6172
6173 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6174 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6175 options are required for these chips.
6176 @end ifset
6177 @end ifclear
6178
6179 @ifset I960
6180 @ifclear GENERIC
6181 @raisesections
6182 @end ifclear
6183
6184 @node i960
6185 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6186
6187 @cindex i960 support
6188
6189 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6190 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6191 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6192 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6193 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6194 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6195 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6196
6197 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6198 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6199 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6200 the names
6201
6202 @smallexample
6203 @group
6204 try
6205 libtry.a
6206 tryca
6207 libtryca.a
6208 @end group
6209 @end smallexample
6210
6211 @noindent
6212 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6213 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6214
6215 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6216 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6217 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6218 specifies a library.
6219
6220 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6221 @cindex relaxing on i960
6222 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6223 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6224 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6225 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6226 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6227 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6228 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6229 not itself call any subroutines).
6230
6231 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6232 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6233 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6234 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6235
6236 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6237
6238 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6239 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6240 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6241
6242 @ifclear GENERIC
6243 @lowersections
6244 @end ifclear
6245 @end ifset
6246
6247 @ifset ARM
6248 @ifclear GENERIC
6249 @raisesections
6250 @end ifclear
6251
6252 @ifset M68HC11
6253 @ifclear GENERIC
6254 @raisesections
6255 @end ifclear
6256
6257 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6258 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6259
6260 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6261
6262 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6263
6264 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6265 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6266
6267 @table @emph
6268 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6269 @item relaxing address modes
6270 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6271 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6272 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6273 respectively.
6274
6275 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6276 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6277 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6278
6279 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6280 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6281 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6282 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6283 @code{bset} instructions.
6284
6285 @end table
6286
6287 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6288
6289 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6290 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6291 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6292 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6293 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6294 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6295 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6296 point to the function trampoline.
6297
6298 @ifclear GENERIC
6299 @lowersections
6300 @end ifclear
6301 @end ifset
6302
6303 @node ARM
6304 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6305
6306 @cindex ARM interworking support
6307 @kindex --support-old-code
6308 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6309 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6310 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6311 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6312 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6313 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6314 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6315 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6316 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6317 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6318
6319 @cindex thumb entry point
6320 @cindex entry point, thumb
6321 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6322 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6323 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6324 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6325 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6326 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6327
6328 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6329 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6330 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6331 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6332 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6333 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6334
6335 @cindex BE8
6336 @kindex --be8
6337 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6338 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6339 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6340
6341 @cindex TARGET1
6342 @kindex --target1-rel
6343 @kindex --target1-abs
6344 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6345 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6346 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6347 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6348
6349 @cindex TARGET2
6350 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6351 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6352 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6353 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6354 @table @samp
6355 @item rel
6356 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6357 @item abs
6358 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6359 @item got-rel
6360 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6361 @end table
6362
6363 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6364 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6365 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6366 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6367 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6368 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6369
6370 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6371 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6372 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6373
6374 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6375 relocations are ignored.
6376
6377 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6378 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6379 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6380 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6381
6382 @smallexample
6383 TST rM, #1
6384 MOVEQ PC, rM
6385 BX Rn
6386 @end smallexample
6387
6388 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6389 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6390 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6391
6392 @cindex USE_BLX
6393 @kindex --use-blx
6394 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6395 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6396 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6397 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6398 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6399
6400 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6401 specify it if you are using that target.
6402
6403 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6404 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6405 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6406 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6407 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6408 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6409 the support code can read the intended values.
6410
6411 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6412 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6413 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6414 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6415 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6416 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6417
6418 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6419 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6420 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6421 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6422 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6423 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6424
6425 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6426 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6427 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6428 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6429 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6430 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6431 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6432
6433 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6434 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6435 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6436 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6437 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6438 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6439 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6440
6441 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6442 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6443 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6444
6445 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6446 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6447 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6448 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6449 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6450 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6451 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6452 not be diagnosed.
6453
6454 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6455 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6456 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6457 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6458 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6459 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6460 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6461
6462 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6463 @kindex --pic-veneer
6464 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6465 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6466 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6467 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6468
6469 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6470 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6471 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6472 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6473 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6474 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6475 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6476 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6477 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6478 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6479 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6480 where they should be placed.
6481
6482 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6483 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6484 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6485 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6486 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6487 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6488 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6489 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6490 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6491 from the input sections.
6492
6493 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6494 @samp{N = +1}.
6495
6496 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6497 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6498 otherwise.
6499
6500 @ifclear GENERIC
6501 @lowersections
6502 @end ifclear
6503 @end ifset
6504
6505 @ifset HPPA
6506 @ifclear GENERIC
6507 @raisesections
6508 @end ifclear
6509
6510 @node HPPA ELF32
6511 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6512 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6513 @kindex --multi-subspace
6514 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6515 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6516 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6517 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6518 multiple sub-spaces.
6519
6520 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6521 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6522 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6523 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6524 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6525 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6526 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6527 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6528 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6529 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6530 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6531 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6532 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6533 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6534 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6535 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6536
6537 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6538 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6539 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6540 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6541
6542 @ifclear GENERIC
6543 @lowersections
6544 @end ifclear
6545 @end ifset
6546
6547 @ifset M68K
6548 @ifclear GENERIC
6549 @raisesections
6550 @end ifclear
6551
6552 @node M68K
6553 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6554
6555 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6556 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6557 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6558 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6559 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6560 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6561 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6562 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6563 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6564 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6565 support such GOTs.
6566 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6567 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6568 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6569 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6570
6571 @ifclear GENERIC
6572 @lowersections
6573 @end ifclear
6574 @end ifset
6575
6576 @ifset MIPS
6577 @ifclear GENERIC
6578 @raisesections
6579 @end ifclear
6580
6581 @node MIPS
6582 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6583
6584 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6585 @kindex --insn32
6586 @kindex --no-insn32
6587 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6588 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6589 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6590 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6591 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6592 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6593
6594 @ifclear GENERIC
6595 @lowersections
6596 @end ifclear
6597 @end ifset
6598
6599 @ifset MMIX
6600 @ifclear GENERIC
6601 @raisesections
6602 @end ifclear
6603
6604 @node MMIX
6605 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6606 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6607 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6608 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6609 can translate between the two formats.
6610
6611 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6612 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6613 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6614 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6615 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6616 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6617 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6618 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6619
6620 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6621 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6622 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6623 of a section.
6624
6625 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6626 are left out from an mmo file.
6627
6628 @ifclear GENERIC
6629 @lowersections
6630 @end ifclear
6631 @end ifset
6632
6633 @ifset MSP430
6634 @ifclear GENERIC
6635 @raisesections
6636 @end ifclear
6637
6638 @node MSP430
6639 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6640 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6641 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6642 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6643
6644 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6645 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6646
6647 @table @code
6648 @item @samp{.vectors}
6649 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6650
6651 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6652 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6653 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6654
6655 @item @samp{.infomem}
6656 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6657 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6658
6659 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6660 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6661 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6662
6663 @item @samp{.noinit}
6664 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6665
6666 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6667 @end table
6668
6669 @ifclear GENERIC
6670 @lowersections
6671 @end ifclear
6672 @end ifset
6673
6674 @ifset POWERPC
6675 @ifclear GENERIC
6676 @raisesections
6677 @end ifclear
6678
6679 @node PowerPC ELF32
6680 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6681 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6682 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6683 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6684 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6685 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6686 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6687 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6688 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6689 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6690 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6691 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6692 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6693
6694 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6695 @table @option
6696 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6697 @kindex --bss-plt
6698 @item --bss-plt
6699 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6700 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6701 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6702 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6703 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6704 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6705 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6706 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6707
6708 @kindex --secure-plt
6709 @item --secure-plt
6710 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6711 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6712 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6713 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6714 style BSS PLT.
6715
6716 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6717 @kindex --sdata-got
6718 @item --sdata-got
6719 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6720 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6721 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6722 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6723 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6724 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6725 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6726 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6727 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6728 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6729 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6730 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6731
6732 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6733 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6734 @item --emit-stub-syms
6735 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6736 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6737
6738 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6739 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6740 @item --no-tls-optimize
6741 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6742 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6743 disable the optimization.
6744 @end table
6745
6746 @ifclear GENERIC
6747 @lowersections
6748 @end ifclear
6749 @end ifset
6750
6751 @ifset POWERPC64
6752 @ifclear GENERIC
6753 @raisesections
6754 @end ifclear
6755
6756 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6757 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6758
6759 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6760 @table @option
6761 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6762 @kindex --stub-group-size
6763 @item --stub-group-size
6764 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6765 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6766 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6767 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6768 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6769 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6770 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6771 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6772 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6773 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6774 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6775 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6776 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6777 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6778
6779 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6780 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6781 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6782 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6783
6784 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6785 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6786 @item --emit-stub-syms
6787 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6788 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6789
6790 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6791 @kindex --dotsyms
6792 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6793 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6794 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6795 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6796 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6797 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6798 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6799 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6800 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6801 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6802 feature.
6803
6804 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6805 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6806 @item --no-tls-optimize
6807 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6808 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6809 disable the optimization.
6810
6811 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6812 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6813 @item --no-opd-optimize
6814 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6815 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6816 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6817 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6818
6819 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6820 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6821 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6822 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6823 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6824 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6825 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6826
6827 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6828 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6829 @item --no-toc-optimize
6830 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6831 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6832 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6833 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6834 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6835 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6836 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6837 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6838 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6839 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6840 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6841 optimization.
6842
6843 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6844 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6845 @item --no-multi-toc
6846 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6847 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6848 where TOC
6849 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6850 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6851 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6852 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6853 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6854 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6855 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6856 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6857
6858 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6859 @kindex --no-toc-sort
6860 @item --no-toc-sort
6861 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6862 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6863 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6864 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6865 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6866 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6867 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6868 off this feature.
6869
6870 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6871 @kindex --plt-align
6872 @kindex --no-plt-align
6873 @item --plt-align
6874 @itemx --no-plt-align
6875 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6876 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6877 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6878 are packed tightly.
6879
6880 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6881 @kindex --plt-static-chain
6882 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6883 @item --plt-static-chain
6884 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6885 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6886 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6887 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6888
6889 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6890 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
6891 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6892 @item --plt-thread-safe
6893 @itemx --no-thread-safe
6894 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6895 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6896 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6897 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6898 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6899 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6900 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6901 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6902 default behaviour.
6903 @end table
6904
6905 @ifclear GENERIC
6906 @lowersections
6907 @end ifclear
6908 @end ifset
6909
6910 @ifset SPU
6911 @ifclear GENERIC
6912 @raisesections
6913 @end ifclear
6914
6915 @node SPU ELF
6916 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6917
6918 @cindex SPU ELF options
6919 @table @option
6920
6921 @cindex SPU plugins
6922 @kindex --plugin
6923 @item --plugin
6924 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6925
6926 @cindex SPU overlays
6927 @kindex --no-overlays
6928 @item --no-overlays
6929 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6930 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6931 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6932 turns off all this special overlay handling.
6933
6934 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6935 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6936 @item --emit-stub-syms
6937 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6938 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6939
6940 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6941 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6942 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
6943 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6944 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6945 on calls to non-overlay regions.
6946
6947 @cindex SPU local store size
6948 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6949 @item --local-store=lo:hi
6950 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6951 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6952 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6953
6954 @cindex SPU
6955 @kindex --stack-analysis
6956 @item --stack-analysis
6957 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6958 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6959 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6960 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6961 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6962 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6963 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6964 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6965 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6966 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6967 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6968 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6969 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6970 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6971 and calls will be given.
6972
6973 @cindex SPU
6974 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
6975 @item --emit-stack-syms
6976 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6977 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6978 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6979 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6980 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6981 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6982 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
6983 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
6984 @end table
6985
6986 @ifclear GENERIC
6987 @lowersections
6988 @end ifclear
6989 @end ifset
6990
6991 @ifset TICOFF
6992 @ifclear GENERIC
6993 @raisesections
6994 @end ifclear
6995
6996 @node TI COFF
6997 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6998 @cindex TI COFF versions
6999 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7000 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7001 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7002 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7003 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7004 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7005
7006 @ifclear GENERIC
7007 @lowersections
7008 @end ifclear
7009 @end ifset
7010
7011 @ifset WIN32
7012 @ifclear GENERIC
7013 @raisesections
7014 @end ifclear
7015
7016 @node WIN32
7017 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7018
7019 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7020 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7021 command line options mentioned here.
7022
7023 @table @emph
7024 @cindex import libraries
7025 @item import libraries
7026 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7027 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7028 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7029 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7030 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7031 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7032
7033 @item exporting DLL symbols
7034 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7035 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7036
7037 @table @emph
7038 @item using auto-export functionality
7039 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7040 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7041 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7042
7043 @itemize
7044 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7045 @item --exclude-symbols
7046 @item --exclude-libs
7047 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7048 @item --version-script
7049 @end itemize
7050
7051 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7052 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7053 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7054 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7055 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7056 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7057 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7058 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7059
7060 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7061 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7062 if either of the following are true:
7063
7064 @itemize
7065 @item A DEF file is used.
7066 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7067 @end itemize
7068
7069 @item using a DEF file
7070 @cindex using a DEF file
7071 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7072 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7073 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7074 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7075 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7076
7077 @example
7078 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7079 @end example
7080
7081 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7082 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7083
7084 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7085
7086 @example
7087 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7088
7089 EXPORTS
7090 foo
7091 bar
7092 _bar = bar
7093 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7094 var1 DATA
7095 doo = foo == foo2
7096 eoo DATA == var1
7097 @end example
7098
7099 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7100 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7101 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7102 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7103 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7104 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7105 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7106 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7107 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7108
7109 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7110 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7111 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7112
7113 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7114 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7115 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7116 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7117
7118 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7119 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7120 non-default base address for the image.
7121
7122 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7123 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7124 filename specified on the command line.
7125
7126 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7127
7128 @example
7129 EXPORTS
7130 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7131 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7132 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7133 @end example
7134
7135 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7136 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7137 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7138 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7139 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7140 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7141 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7142
7143 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7144
7145 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7146 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7147 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7148 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7149 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7150
7151 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7152 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7153 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7154 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7155
7156 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7157 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7158 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7159 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7160 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7161 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7162 application will behave unexpectedly.
7163
7164 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7165 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7166 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7167 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7168 the DLL without an import library.
7169
7170 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7171 other DEF file statements
7172
7173 @cindex creating a DEF file
7174 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7175 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7176
7177 @item Using decorations
7178 @cindex Using decorations
7179 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7180 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7181 declared as:
7182
7183 @example
7184 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7185 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7186 @end example
7187
7188 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7189 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7190 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7191 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7192
7193 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7194 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7195 instead:
7196
7197 @example
7198 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7199 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7200 @end example
7201
7202 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7203 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7204 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7205 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7206 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7207 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7208 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7209 information.
7210 @end table
7211
7212 @cindex automatic data imports
7213 @item automatic data imports
7214 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7215 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7216 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7217 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7218 code to these platforms, especially for large
7219 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7220 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7221 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7222 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7223 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7224 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7225 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7226 trigger the feature's use.
7227
7228 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7229 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7230
7231 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7232 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7233
7234 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7235 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7236 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7237 below.
7238
7239 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7240 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7241 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7242 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7243 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7244 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7245 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7246 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7247 references.
7248
7249 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7250 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7251 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7252 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7253 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7254 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7255 run without error on an older system.
7256
7257 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7258 enabled as needed.
7259
7260 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7261 @item direct linking to a dll
7262 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7263 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7264 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7265 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7266 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7267 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7268 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7269 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7270 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7271 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7272
7273 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7274 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7275 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7276 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7277 select the dll instead of an import library.
7278
7279
7280 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7281 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7282
7283 @example
7284 libxxx.dll.a
7285 xxx.dll.a
7286 libxxx.a
7287 xxx.lib
7288 cygxxx.dll (*)
7289 libxxx.dll
7290 xxx.dll
7291 @end example
7292
7293 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7294
7295 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7296 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7297 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7298 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7299 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7300
7301 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7302 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7303 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7304 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7305 could coexist on the same machine.
7306
7307 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7308 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7309 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7310
7311 @example
7312 bin/
7313 cygxxx.dll
7314 lib/
7315 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7316 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7317 @end example
7318
7319 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7320 done two ways:
7321
7322 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7323 @example
7324 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7325 @end example
7326
7327 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7328 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7329 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7330 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7331
7332 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7333 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7334 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7335 making the app/dll.
7336
7337 @example
7338 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7339 @end example
7340
7341 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7342
7343 @example
7344 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7345 @end example
7346
7347 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7348 perfectly legal
7349
7350 @example
7351 bin/
7352 cygxxx-5.dll
7353 lib/
7354 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7355 @end example
7356
7357 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7358 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7359 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7360
7361 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7362 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7363
7364 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7365 work with auto-imported data.
7366
7367 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7368 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7369 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7370 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7371 possible to do this without an import lib.
7372
7373 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7374 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7375 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7376 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7377
7378 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7379 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7380 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7381 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7382 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7383 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7384 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7385
7386 @item symbol aliasing
7387 @table @emph
7388 @item adding additional names
7389 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7390 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7391 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7392 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7393 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7394
7395 @example
7396 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7397
7398 EXPORTS
7399 foo
7400 _foo = foo
7401 @end example
7402
7403 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7404
7405 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7406 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7407
7408 @example
7409 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7410 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7411 @end example
7412
7413 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7414 symbols.
7415
7416 @item renaming symbols
7417 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7418 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7419 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7420 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7421 created). In the following example:
7422
7423 @example
7424 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7425
7426 EXPORTS
7427 _foo = foo
7428 @end example
7429
7430 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7431 @samp{_foo}.
7432 @end table
7433
7434 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7435 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7436 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7437 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7438 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7439 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7440 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7441 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7442 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7443 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7444 which is probably not what you wanted.
7445
7446 @cindex weak externals
7447 @item weak externals
7448 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7449 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7450 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7451 are three variants of weak externals:
7452 @itemize
7453 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7454 called lazy externals.
7455 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7456 This form is not presently implemented.
7457 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7458 implemented.
7459 @end itemize
7460 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7461 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7462 uses a default value.
7463
7464 @cindex aligned common symbols
7465 @item aligned common symbols
7466 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7467 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7468 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7469 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7470 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7471 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7472 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7473 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7474 @end table
7475
7476 @ifclear GENERIC
7477 @lowersections
7478 @end ifclear
7479 @end ifset
7480
7481 @ifset XTENSA
7482 @ifclear GENERIC
7483 @raisesections
7484 @end ifclear
7485
7486 @node Xtensa
7487 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7488
7489 @cindex Xtensa processors
7490 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7491 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7492 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7493 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7494 example, with the command:
7495
7496 @smallexample
7497 SECTIONS
7498 @{
7499 .text : @{
7500 *(.literal .text)
7501 @}
7502 @}
7503 @end smallexample
7504
7505 @noindent
7506 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7507 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7508 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7509 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7510 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7511 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7512 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7513
7514 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7515 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7516 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7517 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7518 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7519 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7520 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7521 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7522 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7523 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7524 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7525 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7526
7527 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7528 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7529 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7530 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7531 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7532 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7533 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7534 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7535 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7536 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7537 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7538 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7539 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7540 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7541
7542 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7543 control the linker:
7544
7545 @cindex Xtensa options
7546 @table @option
7547 @item --size-opt
7548 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7549 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7550 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7551 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7552 preserve the correctness of the code.
7553 @end table
7554
7555 @ifclear GENERIC
7556 @lowersections
7557 @end ifclear
7558 @end ifset
7559
7560 @ifclear SingleFormat
7561 @node BFD
7562 @chapter BFD
7563
7564 @cindex back end
7565 @cindex object file management
7566 @cindex object formats available
7567 @kindex objdump -i
7568 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7569 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7570 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7571 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7572 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7573 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7574 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7575 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7576 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7577
7578 @cindex BFD requirements
7579 @cindex requirements for BFD
7580 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7581 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7582 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7583 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7584 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7585 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7586 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7587
7588 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7589 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7590 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7591 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7592
7593 @menu
7594 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7595 @end menu
7596
7597 @node BFD outline
7598 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7599 @cindex opening object files
7600 @include bfdsumm.texi
7601 @end ifclear
7602
7603 @node Reporting Bugs
7604 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7605 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7606 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7607
7608 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7609
7610 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7611 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7612 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7613 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7614 @command{ld}.
7615
7616 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7617 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7618
7619 @menu
7620 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7621 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7622 @end menu
7623
7624 @node Bug Criteria
7625 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7626 @cindex bug criteria
7627
7628 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7629
7630 @itemize @bullet
7631 @cindex fatal signal
7632 @cindex linker crash
7633 @cindex crash of linker
7634 @item
7635 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7636 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7637
7638 @cindex error on valid input
7639 @item
7640 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7641
7642 @cindex invalid input
7643 @item
7644 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7645 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7646 object files are correct.
7647
7648 @item
7649 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7650 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7651 @end itemize
7652
7653 @node Bug Reporting
7654 @section How to Report Bugs
7655 @cindex bug reports
7656 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7657
7658 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7659 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7660 recommend you contact that organization first.
7661
7662 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7663 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7664 distribution.
7665
7666 @ifset BUGURL
7667 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7668 @value{BUGURL}.
7669 @end ifset
7670
7671 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7672 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7673 fact or leave it out, state it!
7674
7675 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7676 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7677 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7678 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7679 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7680 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7681 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7682 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7683 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7684 and the most helpful.
7685
7686 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7687 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7688 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7689
7690 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7691 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7692 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7693 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7694
7695 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7696
7697 @itemize @bullet
7698 @item
7699 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7700 the @samp{--version} argument.
7701
7702 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7703 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7704
7705 @item
7706 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7707 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7708
7709 @item
7710 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7711 version number.
7712
7713 @item
7714 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7715 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7716
7717 @item
7718 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7719 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7720 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7721 sufficient.
7722
7723 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7724 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7725
7726 @item
7727 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7728 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7729 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7730 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7731 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7732 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7733 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7734 attachments are best.
7735
7736 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7737 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7738 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7739 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7740 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7741
7742 @item
7743 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7744 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7745
7746 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7747 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7748 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7749 a chance to make a mistake.
7750
7751 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7752 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7753 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7754 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7755 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7756 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7757 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7758 any conclusion from our observations.
7759
7760 @item
7761 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7762 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7763 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7764 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7765 context, not by line number.
7766
7767 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7768 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7769 @end itemize
7770
7771 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7772
7773 @itemize @bullet
7774 @item
7775 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7776
7777 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7778 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7779 changes will not affect it.
7780
7781 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7782 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7783 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7784 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7785
7786 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7787 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7788 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7789 less time, and so on.
7790
7791 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7792 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7793
7794 @item
7795 A patch for the bug.
7796
7797 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7798 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7799 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7800 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7801
7802 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7803 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7804 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7805 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7806 fixed.
7807
7808 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7809 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7810 help us to understand.
7811
7812 @item
7813 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7814
7815 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7816 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7817 @end itemize
7818
7819 @node MRI
7820 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7821 @cindex MRI compatibility
7822 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7823 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7824 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7825 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7826 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7827 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7828 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7829
7830 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7831 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7832 features to make use of them.
7833
7834 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7835 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7836
7837 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7838 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7839 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7840 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7841 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7842
7843 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7844
7845 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7846 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7847 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7848
7849 @table @code
7850 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7851 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7852 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7853 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7854 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7855 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7856 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7857 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7858 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7859 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7860 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7861
7862 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7863 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7864 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7865 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7866
7867 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7868
7869 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7870 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7871 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7872 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
7873
7874 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7875 @item BASE @var{expression}
7876 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7877 absolute addresses) in the output file.
7878
7879 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7880 @item CHIP @var{expression}
7881 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7882 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7883
7884 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7885 @item END
7886 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7887
7888 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7889 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7890 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7891 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7892
7893 @enumerate
7894 @item
7895 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7896
7897 @item
7898 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7899
7900 @item
7901 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7902 @samp{COFF}
7903 @end enumerate
7904
7905 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7906 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7907 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7908 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7909
7910 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7911 same line, with no change in its effect.
7912
7913 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7914 @item LOAD @var{filename}
7915 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7916 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7917 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7918 command line.
7919
7920 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7921 @item NAME @var{output-name}
7922 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7923 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7924 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7925
7926 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7927 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7928 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7929 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7930 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7931 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7932 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7933 file, in the order specified.
7934
7935 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7936 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7937 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7938 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7939 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7940 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
7941
7942 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7943 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7944 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7945 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7946 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7947 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7948 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7949 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7950 @end table
7951
7952 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7953 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7954 @include fdl.texi
7955
7956 @node LD Index
7957 @unnumbered LD Index
7958
7959 @printindex cp
7960
7961 @tex
7962 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7963 % meantime:
7964 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7965 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7966 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7967 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7968 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7969 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7970 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7971 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7972 \page\colophon
7973 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7974 @end tex
7975
7976 @bye
This page took 0.19368 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.